<!doctype linuxdoc system>

<!-- This is the tutorial marked up in SGML
     (just to show how to write a comment)
-->

<article>
<title>GTK Tutorial
<author>Ian Main <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:imain@gtk.org"
			      name="&lt;imain@gtk.org&gt;"></tt>,
Tony Gale <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:gale@gtk.org"
			      name="&lt;gale@gtk.org&gt;"></tt>
<date>April 6th, 1998

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Introduction
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
GTK (GIMP Toolkit) was originally developed as a toolkit for the GIMP
(General Image Manipulation Program).  GTK is built on top of GDK (GIMP
Drawing Kit)  which is basically wrapper around the Xlib functions.  It's
called the GIMP toolkit because it was original written for developing
the GIMP, but has now been used in several free software projects.  The
authors are
<itemize>
<item> Peter Mattis   <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:petm@xcf.berkeley.edu"
			   name="petm@xcf.berkeley.edu"></tt>
<item> Spencer Kimball <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:spencer@xcf.berkeley.edu"
			   name="spencer@xcf.berkeley.edu"></tt>
<item> Josh MacDonald <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:jmacd@xcf.berkeley.edu"
			   name="jmacd@xcf.berkeley.edu"></tt>
</itemize>

<p>
GTK is essentially an object oriented application programmers interface (API).  
Although written completely in
C, it is implemented using the idea of classes and callback functions
(pointers to functions).
<p>
There is also a third component called glib which contains a few
replacements for some standard calls, as well as some additional functions
for handling linked lists etc.  The replacement functions are used to 
increase GTK's portability, as some of the functions implemented 
here are not available or are nonstandard on other unicies such as 
g_strerror().   Some also contain enhancements to the libc versions, such as
g_malloc that has enhanced debugging utilities.
<p>
This tutorial is an attempt to document as much as possible of GTK, it is by 
no means complete.  This
tutorial assumes a good understanding of C, and how to create C programs.
It would be a great benefit for the reader to have previous X programming
experience, but it shouldn't be necessary.  If you are learning GTK as your
first widget set, please comment on how you found this tutorial, and what
you had trouble with.
Note that there is also a C++ API for GTK (GTK--) in the works, so if you
prefer to use C++, you should look into this instead.  There's also an
Objective C wrapper, and guile bindings available, but I don't follow these.
<p>
I would very much like to hear any problems you have learning GTK from this
document, and would appreciate input as to how it may be improved.

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Getting Started
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<p>
The first thing to do of course, is download the GTK source and install
it.  You can always get the latest version from ftp.gtk.org in /pub/gtk.
You can also view other sources of GTK information on http://www.gtk.org/
<htmlurl url="http://www.gtk.org/" name="http://www.gtk.org/">.
GTK uses GNU autoconf for
configuration.  Once untar'd, type ./configure --help to see a list of options.
<p>
To begin our introduction to GTK, we'll start with the simplest program 
possible.  This program will
create a 200x200 pixel window and has no way of exiting except to be
killed using the shell.

<tscreen><verb>
#include <gtk/gtk.h>

int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
    GtkWidget *window;
    
    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
    
    window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
    gtk_widget_show (window);
    
    gtk_main ();
    
    return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>

All programs will of course include the gtk/gtk.h which declares the
variables, functions, structures etc. that will be used in your GTK 
application.
<p>
The next line:

<tscreen><verb>
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
</verb></tscreen>

calls the function gtk_init(gint *argc, gchar ***argv) which will be
called in all GTK applications.  This sets up a few things for us such
as the default visual and color map and then proceeds to call
gdk_init(gint *argc, gchar ***argv).  This function initializes the
library for use, sets up default signal handlers, and checks the
arguments passed to your application on the command line, looking for one
of the following:

<itemize>
<item> <tt/--display/
<item> <tt/--debug-level/
<item> <tt/--no-xshm/
<item> <tt/--sync/
<item> <tt/--show-events/
<item> <tt/--no-show-events/
</itemize>
<p>
It removes these from the argument list, leaving anything it does
not recognize for your application to parse or ignore.	This creates a set
of standard arguments accepted by all GTK applications.
<p>
The next two lines of code create and display a window.

<tscreen><verb>
  window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
  gtk_widget_show (window);
</verb></tscreen>

The GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL argument specifies that we want the window to
undergo window manager decoration and placement. Rather than create a
window of 0x0 size, a window without children is set to 200x200 by default
so you can still manipulate it.
<p>
The gtk_widget_show() function, lets GTK know that we are done setting the
attributes of this widget, and it can display it.
<p>
The last line enters the GTK main processing loop.

<tscreen><verb>
gtk_main ();
</verb></tscreen>

gtk_main() is another call you will see in every GTK application.  When
control reaches this point, GTK will sleep waiting for X events (such as
button or key presses), timeouts, or file IO notifications to occur.
In our simple example however, events are ignored.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Hello World in GTK
<p>
OK, now for a program with a widget (a button).  It's the classic hello
world ala GTK.

<tscreen><verb>
/* helloworld.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>

/* this is a callback function. the data arguments are ignored in this example..
 * More on callbacks below. */
void hello (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
    g_print ("Hello World\n");
}

gint delete_event(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
    g_print ("delete event occured\n");
    /* if you return FALSE in the "delete_event" signal handler,
     * GTK will emit the "destroy" signal.  Returning TRUE means
     * you don't want the window to be destroyed.
     * This is useful for popping up 'are you sure you want to quit ?'
     * type dialogs. */

    /* Change TRUE to FALSE and the main window will be destroyed with
     * a "delete_event". */

    return (TRUE);
}

/* another callback */
void destroy (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
    gtk_main_quit ();
}

int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
    /* GtkWidget is the storage type for widgets */
    GtkWidget *window;
    GtkWidget *button;
    
    /* this is called in all GTK applications.  arguments are parsed from
     * the command line and are returned to the application. */
    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
    
    /* create a new window */
    window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
    
    /* when the window is given the "delete_event" signal (this is given
    * by the window manager (usually the 'close' option, or on the
    * titlebar), we ask it to call the delete_event () function
    * as defined above.  The data passed to the callback
    * function is NULL and is ignored in the callback. */
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (delete_event), NULL);
    
    /* here we connect the "destroy" event to a signal handler.  
     * This event occurs when we call gtk_widget_destroy() on the window,
     * or if we return 'FALSE' in the "delete_event" callback. */
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (destroy), NULL);
    
    /* sets the border width of the window. */
    gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
    
    /* creates a new button with the label "Hello World". */
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Hello World");
    
    /* When the button receives the "clicked" signal, it will call the
     * function hello() passing it NULL as it's argument.  The hello() function is
     * defined above. */
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (hello), NULL);
    
    /* This will cause the window to be destroyed by calling
     * gtk_widget_destroy(window) when "clicked".  Again, the destroy
     * signal could come from here, or the window manager. */
    gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			       GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_widget_destroy),
			       GTK_OBJECT (window));
    
    /* this packs the button into the window (a gtk container). */
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), button);
    
    /* the final step is to display this newly created widget... */
    gtk_widget_show (button);
    
    /* and the window */
    gtk_widget_show (window);
    
    /* all GTK applications must have a gtk_main().	Control ends here
     * and waits for an event to occur (like a key press or mouse event). */
    gtk_main ();
    
    return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Compiling Hello World
<p>
To compile use:

<tscreen><verb>
gcc -Wall -g helloworld.c -o hello_world `gtk-config --cflags` \
    `gtk-config --libs`
</verb></tscreen>
<p>

This uses the program <tt>gtk-config</>, which comes with gtk. This
program 'knows' what compiler switches are needed to compile programs
that use gtk. <tt>gtk-config --cflags</> will output a list of include
directories for the compiler to look in, and <tt>gtk-config --libs</>
will output the list of libraries for the compiler to link with and
the directories to find them in.

<p>
The libraries that are usually linked in are:
<itemize>
<item>The GTK library (-lgtk), the widget library, based on top of GDK.
<item>The GDK library (-lgdk), the Xlib wrapper.
<item>The glib library (-lglib), containing miscellaneous functions, only
g_print() is used in this particular example.  GTK is built on top
of glib so you will always require this library.  See the section on 
<ref id="sec_glib" name="glib"> for details.  
<item>The Xlib library (-lX11) which is used by GDK.
<item>The Xext library (-lXext).  This contains code for shared memory
pixmaps and other X extensions.
<item>The math library (-lm).  This is used by GTK for various purposes.
</itemize>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Theory of Signals and Callbacks
<p>
Before we look in detail at hello world, we'll discuss events and callbacks.
GTK is an event driven toolkit, which means it will sleep in
gtk_main until an event occurs and control is passed to the appropriate
function.
<p>
This passing of control is done using the idea of "signals".  When an 
event occurs, such as the press of a mouse button, the
appropriate signal will be "emitted" by the widget that was pressed.  
This is how GTK does
most of its useful work.  To make a button perform an action, 
we set up a signal handler to catch these
signals and call the appropriate function.  This is done by using a 
function such as:

<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_signal_connect (GtkObject *object,
                         gchar *name,
			 GtkSignalFunc func,
			 gpointer func_data);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Where the first argument is the widget which will be emitting the signal, and
the second, the name of the signal you wish to catch.  The third is the function
you wish to be called when it is caught, and the fourth, the data you wish
to have passed to this function.
<p>
The function specified in the third argument is called a "callback
function", and should be of the form:

<tscreen><verb>
void callback_func(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *callback_data);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Where the first argument will be a pointer to the widget that emitted the signal, and
the second, a pointer to the data given as the last argument to the
gtk_signal_connect() function as shown above.
<p>
Another call used in the hello world example, is:

<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_signal_connect_object (GtkObject *object,
                                gchar  *name,
				GtkSignalFunc func,
				GtkObject *slot_object);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
gtk_signal_connect_object() is the same as gtk_signal_connect() except that
the callback function only uses one argument, a
pointer to a GTK 
object.  So when using this function to connect signals, the callback should be of
the form:

<tscreen><verb>
void callback_func (GtkObject *object);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Where the object is usually a widget.  We usually don't setup callbacks for
gtk_signal_connect_object however.  They are usually used 
to call a GTK function that accept a single widget or object as an
argument, as is the case in our hello world example.

The purpose of having two functions to connect signals is simply to allow
the callbacks to have a different number of arguments.  Many functions in
the GTK library accept only a single GtkWidget pointer as an argument, so you
want to use the gtk_signal_connect_object() for these, whereas for your 
functions, you may need to have additional data supplied to the callbacks.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Stepping Through Hello World
<p>
Now that we know the theory behind this, lets clarify by walking through 
the example hello world program.
<p>
Here is the callback function that will be called when the button is
"clicked".  We ignore both the widget and the data in this example, but it 
is not hard to do things with them.  The next example will use the data 
argument to tell us which button was pressed.

<tscreen><verb>
void hello (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data)
{
    g_print ("Hello World\n");
}
</verb></tscreen>

<p>
This callback is a bit special.  The "delete_event" occurs when the
window manager sends this event to the application.  We have a choice here
as to what to do about these events.  We can ignore them, make some sort of
response, or simply quit the application.

The value you return in this callback lets GTK know what action to take.
By returning TRUE, we let it know that we don't want to have the "destroy"
signal emitted, keeping our application running.  By returning FALSE, we 
ask that "destroy" is emitted, which in turn will call our "destroy" 
signal handler.

<tscreen><verb>
gint delete_event(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
    g_print ("delete event occured\n");

    return (TRUE); 
}
</verb></tscreen>

<p>
Here is another callback function which causes the program to quit by calling
gtk_main_quit().  This function tells GTK that it is to exit from gtk_main
when control is returned to it.

<tscreen><verb>
void destroy (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data)
{
    gtk_main_quit ();
}
</verb></tscreen>

<p>
I assume you know about the main() function... yes, as with other
applications, all GTK applications will also have one of these.
<tscreen><verb>
int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
This next part, declares a pointer to a structure of type GtkWidget.  These
are used below to create a window and a button.
<tscreen><verb>
    GtkWidget *window;
    GtkWidget *button;
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Here is our gtk_init again.  As before, this initializes the toolkit, and
parses the arguments found on the command line.  Any argument it
recognizes from the command line, it removes from the list, and modifies
argc and argv to make it look like they never existed, allowing your
application to parse the remaining arguments.
<tscreen><verb>
    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Create a new window.  This is fairly straight forward.  Memory is allocated
for the GtkWidget *window structure so it now points to a valid structure.
It sets up a new window, but it is not displayed until below where we call
gtk_widget_show(window) near the end of our program.
<tscreen><verb>
    window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Here is an example of connecting a signal handler to an object, in this case, the
window.  Here, the "destroy" signal is caught.  This is emitted when we use
the window manager to kill the window (and we return TRUE in the
"delete_event" handler), or when we use the
gtk_widget_destroy() call passing in the window widget as the object to
destroy.  By setting this up, we handle both cases with a single call.
Here, it just calls the destroy() function defined above with a NULL
argument, which quits GTK for us.  
<p>
The GTK_OBJECT and GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC are macros that perform type casting and
checking for us, as well as aid the readability of the code.
<tscreen><verb>
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (destroy), NULL);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
This next function is used to set an attribute of a container object.  
This just sets the window
so it has a blank area along the inside of it 10 pixels wide where no
widgets will go.  There are other similar functions which we will look at 
in the section on 
<ref id="sec_setting_widget_attributes" name="Setting Widget Attributes">
<p>
And again, GTK_CONTAINER is a macro to perform type casting.
<tscreen><verb>
    gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
This call creates a new button.  It allocates space for a new GtkWidget
structure in memory, initializes it, and makes the button pointer point to
it.  It will have the label "Hello World" on it when displayed.
<tscreen><verb>
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Hello World");
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Here, we take this button, and make it do something useful.  We attach a
signal handler to it so when it emits the "clicked" signal, our hello()
function is called.  The data is ignored, so we simply pass in NULL to the
hello() callback function.  Obviously, the "clicked" signal is emitted when
we click the button with our mouse pointer.

<tscreen><verb>
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (hello), NULL);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
We are also going to use this button to exit our program.  This will
illustrate how the "destroy"
signal may come from either the window manager, or our program.  When the
button is "clicked", same as above, it calls the first hello() callback function,
and then this one in the order they are set up.  You may have as many
callback function as you need, and all will be executed in the order you
connected them.  Because the gtk_widget_destroy() function accepts only a
GtkWidget *widget as an argument, we use the gtk_signal_connect_object()
function here instead of straight gtk_signal_connect().

<tscreen><verb>
    gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			       GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_widget_destroy),
			       GTK_OBJECT (window));
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
This is a packing call, which will be explained in depth later on.  But it
is fairly easy to understand.  It simply tells GTK that the button is to be 
placed in the window where it will be displayed.
<tscreen><verb>
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), button);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Now that we have everything setup the way we want it to be.  With all the
signal handlers in place, and the button placed in the window where it
should be, we ask GTK to "show" the widgets on the screen.  The window
widget is shown last so the whole window will pop up at once rather than
seeing the window pop up, and then the button form inside of it.  Although
with such simple example, you'd never notice.
<tscreen><verb>
    gtk_widget_show (button);

    gtk_widget_show (window);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
And of course, we call gtk_main() which waits for events to come from the X
server and will call on the widgets to emit signals when these events come.
<tscreen><verb>
    gtk_main ();
</verb></tscreen>
And the final return.  Control returns here after gtk_quit() is called.
<tscreen><verb>
    return 0;
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Now, when we click the mouse button on a GTK button, the
widget emits a "clicked" signal.  In order for us to use this information, our
program sets up a signal handler to catch that signal, which dispatches the function 
of our choice. In our example, when the button we created is "clicked", the 
hello() function is called with a NULL
argument, and then the next handler for this signal is called.  This calls
the gtk_widget_destroy() function, passing it the window widget as it's
argument, destroying the window widget.  This causes the window to emit the 
"destroy" signal, which is
caught, and calls our destroy() callback function, which simply exits GTK.
<p>
Another course of events, is to use the window manager to kill the window.
This will cause the "delete_event" to be emitted.  This will call our
"delete_event" handler.  If we return TRUE here, the window will be left as
is and nothing will happen.  Returning FALSE will cause GTK to emit the
"destroy" signal which of course, calls the "destroy" callback, exiting GTK.
<p>
Note that these signals are not the same as the Unix system
signals, and are not implemented using them, although the terminology is
almost identical.

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Moving On
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Data Types
<p>
There are a few things you probably noticed in the previous examples that
need explaining.  The 
gint, gchar etc. that you see are typedefs to int and char respectively.  This is done
to get around that nasty dependency on the size of simple data types when doing calculations.
A good example is "gint32" which will be
typedef'd to a 32 bit integer for any given platform, whether it be the 64 bit
alpha, or the 32 bit i386.  The
typedefs are very straight forward and intuitive.  They are all defined in
glib/glib.h (which gets included from gtk.h).
<p>
You'll also notice the ability to use GtkWidget when the function calls for a GtkObject.  
GTK is an object oriented design, and a widget is an object.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>More on Signal Handlers
<p>
Lets take another look at the gtk_signal_connect declaration.

<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_signal_connect (GtkObject *object, gchar *name,
			 GtkSignalFunc func, gpointer func_data);
</verb></tscreen>

Notice the gint return value ?  This is a tag that identifies your callback
function.  As said above, you may have as many callbacks per signal and per
object as you need, and each will be executed in turn, in the order they 
were attached.  

This tag allows you to remove this callback from the list by using:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_signal_disconnect (GtkObject *object,
                            gint id);
</verb></tscreen>
So, by passing in the widget you wish to remove the handler from, and the
tag or id returned by one of the signal_connect functions, you can
disconnect a signal handler.

Another function to remove all the signal handers from an object is:

<tscreen><verb>
gtk_signal_handlers_destroy (GtkObject *object);
</verb></tscreen>

This call is fairly self explanatory.  It simply removes all the current
signal handlers from the object passed in as the first argument.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>An Upgraded Hello World
<p>
Let's take a look at a slightly improved hello world with better examples
of callbacks.  This will also introduce us to our next topic, packing
widgets.

<tscreen><verb>
/* helloworld2.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>

/* Our new improved callback.  The data passed to this function is printed
 * to stdout. */
void callback (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data)
{
    g_print ("Hello again - %s was pressed\n", (char *) data);
}

/* another callback */
void delete_event (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data)
{
    gtk_main_quit ();
}

int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
    /* GtkWidget is the storage type for widgets */
    GtkWidget *window;
    GtkWidget *button;
    GtkWidget *box1;

    /* this is called in all GTK applications.	arguments are parsed from
     * the command line and are returned to the application. */
    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);

    /* create a new window */
    window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);

    /* this is a new call, this just sets the title of our
     * new window to "Hello Buttons!" */
    gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Hello Buttons!");

    /* Here we just set a handler for delete_event that immediately
     * exits GTK. */
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (delete_event), NULL);


    /* sets the border width of the window. */
    gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);

    /* we create a box to pack widgets into.  this is described in detail
     * in the "packing" section below.  The box is not really visible, it
     * is just used as a tool to arrange widgets. */
    box1 = gtk_hbox_new(FALSE, 0);

    /* put the box into the main window. */
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), box1);

    /* creates a new button with the label "Button 1". */
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Button 1");

    /* Now when the button is clicked, we call the "callback" function
     * with a pointer to "button 1" as it's argument */
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (callback), (gpointer) "button 1");

    /* instead of gtk_container_add, we pack this button into the invisible
     * box, which has been packed into the window. */
    gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(box1), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);

    /* always remember this step, this tells GTK that our preparation for
     * this button is complete, and it can be displayed now. */
    gtk_widget_show(button);

    /* do these same steps again to create a second button */
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Button 2");

    /* call the same callback function with a different argument,
     * passing a pointer to "button 2" instead. */
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (callback), (gpointer) "button 2");

    gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(box1), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);

    /* The order in which we show the buttons is not really important, but I
     * recommend showing the window last, so it all pops up at once. */
    gtk_widget_show(button);

    gtk_widget_show(box1);

    gtk_widget_show (window);

    /* rest in gtk_main and wait for the fun to begin! */
    gtk_main ();

    return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>

Compile this program using the same linking arguments as our first example.
You'll notice this time there is no easy way to exit the program, you have 
to use your window manager or command line to kill it.  A good exercise 
for the reader would be to insert a third "Quit" button that will exit the
program.  You may also wish to play with the options to
gtk_box_pack_start() while reading the next section.  
Try resizing the window, and observe the behavior.

Just as a side note, there is another useful define for gtk_window_new() -
GTK_WINDOW_DIALOG.  This interacts with the window manager a little
differently and should be used for transient windows.

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Packing Widgets
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<p>
When creating an application, you'll want to put more than one button
inside a window.  Our first hello world example only used one widget so we
could simply use a gtk_container_add call to "pack" the widget into the
window.  But when you want to put more than one widget into a window, how
do you control where that widget is positioned ?  This is where packing
comes in.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Theory of Packing Boxes
<p>
Most packing is done by creating boxes as in the example above.  These are
invisible widget containers that we can pack our widgets into and come in
two forms, a horizontal box, and a vertical box.  When packing widgets
into a horizontal box, the objects are inserted horizontally from left to
right or right to left depending on the call used. In a vertical box,
widgets are packed from top to bottom or vice versa.  You may use any
combination of boxes inside or beside other boxes to create the desired
effect.
<p>
To create a new horizontal box, we use a call to gtk_hbox_new(), and for
vertical boxes, gtk_vbox_new().  The gtk_box_pack_start() and
gtk_box_pack_end() functions are used to place objects inside of these
containers.  The gtk_box_pack_start() function will start at the top and
work its way down in a vbox, and pack left to right in an hbox.
gtk_box_pack_end() will do the opposite, packing from bottom to top in a
vbox, and right to left in an hbox.  Using these functions allow us to
right justify or left justify our widgets and may be mixed in any way to
achieve the desired effect.  We will use gtk_box_pack_start() in most of
our examples.  An object may be another container or a widget.	And in
fact, many widgets are actually containers themselves including the
button, but we usually only use a label inside a button.
<p>
By using these calls, GTK knows where you want to place your widgets so it
can do automatic resizing and other nifty things.  there's also a number
of options as to how your widgets should be packed. As you can imagine,
this method gives us a quite a bit of flexibility when placing and
creating widgets.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Details of Boxes
<p>
Because of this flexibility, packing boxes in GTK can be confusing at
first. There are a lot of options, and it's not immediately obvious how
they all fit together.	In the end however, there are basically five
different styles you can get.

<p>
<? <CENTER> >
<?
<IMG SRC="gtk_tut_packbox1.gif" VSPACE="15" HSPACE="10" WIDTH="528" HEIGHT="235"
ALT="Box Packing Example Image">
>
<? </CENTER> >

Each line contains one horizontal box (hbox) with several buttons. The
call to gtk_box_pack is shorthand for the call to pack each of the buttons
into the hbox. Each of the buttons is packed into the hbox the same way
(i.e. same arguments to the gtk_box_pack_start () function).
<p>
This is the declaration of the gtk_box_pack_start function.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_box_pack_start (GtkBox    *box,
			 GtkWidget *child,
			 gint	    expand,
			 gint	    fill,
			 gint	    padding);
</verb></tscreen>

The first argument is the box you are packing the object into, the second
is this object.  The objects will all be buttons for now, so we'll be
packing buttons into boxes.
<p>
The expand argument to gtk_box_pack_start() or gtk_box_pack_end() controls
whether the widgets are laid out in the box to fill in all the extra space
in the box so the box is expanded to fill the area alloted to it (TRUE).
Or the box is shrunk to just fit the widgets (FALSE).  Setting expand to
FALSE will allow you to do right and left
justifying of your widgets.  Otherwise, they will all expand to fit in the
box, and the same effect could be achieved by using only one of
gtk_box_pack_start or pack_end functions.
<p>
The fill argument to the gtk_box_pack functions control whether the extra
space is allocated to the objects themselves (TRUE), or as extra padding
in the box around these objects (FALSE). It only has an effect if the
expand argument is also TRUE.
<p>
When creating a new box, the function looks like this:

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget * gtk_hbox_new (gint homogeneous,
			  gint spacing);
</verb></tscreen>

The homogeneous argument to gtk_hbox_new (and the same for gtk_vbox_new)
controls whether each object in the box has the same size (i.e. the same
width in an hbox, or the same height in a vbox). If it is set, the expand
argument to the gtk_box_pack routines is always turned on.
<p>
What's the difference between spacing (set when the box is created) and
padding (set when elements are packed)? Spacing is added between objects,
and padding is added on either side of an object.  The following figure
should make it clearer:

<? <CENTER> >
<?
<IMG ALIGN="center" SRC="gtk_tut_packbox2.gif" WIDTH="509" HEIGHT="213"
VSPACE="15" HSPACE="10" ALT="Box Packing Example Image">
>
<? </CENTER> >

Here is the code used to create the above images.  I've commented it fairly
heavily so hopefully you won't have any problems following it.  Compile it yourself
and play with it.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Packing Demonstration Program
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
/* packbox.c */

#include "gtk/gtk.h"

void
delete_event (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data)
{
    gtk_main_quit ();
}

/* Make a new hbox filled with button-labels. Arguments for the 
 * variables we're interested are passed in to this function. 
 * We do not show the box, but do show everything inside. */
GtkWidget *make_box (gint homogeneous, gint spacing,
		     gint expand, gint fill, gint padding) 
{
    GtkWidget *box;
    GtkWidget *button;
    char padstr[80];
    
    /* create a new hbox with the appropriate homogeneous and spacing
     * settings */
    box = gtk_hbox_new (homogeneous, spacing);
    
    /* create a series of buttons with the appropriate settings */
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("gtk_box_pack");
    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box), button, expand, fill, padding);
    gtk_widget_show (button);
    
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("(box,");
    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box), button, expand, fill, padding);
    gtk_widget_show (button);
    
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("button,");
    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box), button, expand, fill, padding);
    gtk_widget_show (button);
    
    /* create a button with the label depending on the value of
     * expand. */
    if (expand == TRUE)
	    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("TRUE,");
    else
	    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("FALSE,");
    
    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box), button, expand, fill, padding);
    gtk_widget_show (button);
    
    /* This is the same as the button creation for "expand"
     * above, but uses the shorthand form. */
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label (fill ? "TRUE," : "FALSE,");
    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box), button, expand, fill, padding);
    gtk_widget_show (button);
    
    sprintf (padstr, "%d);", padding);
    
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label (padstr);
    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box), button, expand, fill, padding);
    gtk_widget_show (button);
    
    return box;
}

int
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
    GtkWidget *window;
    GtkWidget *button;
    GtkWidget *box1;
    GtkWidget *box2;
    GtkWidget *separator;
    GtkWidget *label;
    GtkWidget *quitbox;
    int which;
    
    /* Our init, don't forget this! :) */
    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
    
    if (argc != 2) {
	fprintf (stderr, "usage: packbox num, where num is 1, 2, or 3.\n");
	/* this just does cleanup in GTK, and exits with an exit status of 1. */
	gtk_exit (1);
    }
    
    which = atoi (argv[1]);

    /* Create our window */
    window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);

    /* You should always remember to connect the destroy signal to the
     * main window.  This is very important for proper intuitive
     * behavior */
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (delete_event), NULL);
    gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
    
    /* We create a vertical box (vbox) to pack the horizontal boxes into.
     * This allows us to stack the horizontal boxes filled with buttons one
     * on top of the other in this vbox. */
    box1 = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 0);
    
    /* which example to show.  These correspond to the pictures above. */
    switch (which) {
    case 1:
	/* create a new label. */
	label = gtk_label_new ("gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 0);");
	
	/* Align the label to the left side.  We'll discuss this function and 
	 * others in the section on Widget Attributes. */
	gtk_misc_set_alignment (GTK_MISC (label), 0, 0);

	/* Pack the label into the vertical box (vbox box1).  Remember that 
	 * widgets added to a vbox will be packed one on top of the other in
	 * order. */
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), label, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	
	/* show the label */
	gtk_widget_show (label);
	
	/* call our make box function - homogeneous = FALSE, spacing = 0,
	 * expand = FALSE, fill = FALSE, padding = 0 */
	box2 = make_box (FALSE, 0, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_widget_show (box2);

	/* call our make box function - homogeneous = FALSE, spacing = 0,
	 * expand = FALSE, fill = FALSE, padding = 0 */
	box2 = make_box (FALSE, 0, TRUE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_widget_show (box2);
	
	/* Args are: homogeneous, spacing, expand, fill, padding */
	box2 = make_box (FALSE, 0, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_widget_show (box2);
	
	/* creates a separator, we'll learn more about these later, 
	 * but they are quite simple. */
	separator = gtk_hseparator_new ();
	
	/* pack the separator into the vbox.  Remember each of these
	 * widgets are being packed into a vbox, so they'll be stacked
	 * vertically. */
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), separator, FALSE, TRUE, 5);
	gtk_widget_show (separator);
	
	/* create another new label, and show it. */
	label = gtk_label_new ("gtk_hbox_new (TRUE, 0);");
	gtk_misc_set_alignment (GTK_MISC (label), 0, 0);
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), label, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_widget_show (label);
	
	/* Args are: homogeneous, spacing, expand, fill, padding */
	box2 = make_box (TRUE, 0, TRUE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_widget_show (box2);
	
	/* Args are: homogeneous, spacing, expand, fill, padding */
	box2 = make_box (TRUE, 0, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_widget_show (box2);
	
	/* another new separator. */
	separator = gtk_hseparator_new ();
	/* The last 3 arguments to gtk_box_pack_start are: expand, fill, padding. */
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), separator, FALSE, TRUE, 5);
	gtk_widget_show (separator);
	
	break;

    case 2:

	/* create a new label, remember box1 is a vbox as created 
	 * near the beginning of main() */
	label = gtk_label_new ("gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 10);");
	gtk_misc_set_alignment (GTK_MISC (label), 0, 0);
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), label, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_widget_show (label);
	
	/* Args are: homogeneous, spacing, expand, fill, padding */
	box2 = make_box (FALSE, 10, TRUE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_widget_show (box2);
	
	/* Args are: homogeneous, spacing, expand, fill, padding */
	box2 = make_box (FALSE, 10, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_widget_show (box2);
	
	separator = gtk_hseparator_new ();
	/* The last 3 arguments to gtk_box_pack_start are: expand, fill, padding. */
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), separator, FALSE, TRUE, 5);
	gtk_widget_show (separator);
	
	label = gtk_label_new ("gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 0);");
	gtk_misc_set_alignment (GTK_MISC (label), 0, 0);
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), label, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_widget_show (label);
	
	/* Args are: homogeneous, spacing, expand, fill, padding */
	box2 = make_box (FALSE, 0, TRUE, FALSE, 10);
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_widget_show (box2);
	
	/* Args are: homogeneous, spacing, expand, fill, padding */
	box2 = make_box (FALSE, 0, TRUE, TRUE, 10);
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_widget_show (box2);
	
	separator = gtk_hseparator_new ();
	/* The last 3 arguments to gtk_box_pack_start are: expand, fill, padding. */
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), separator, FALSE, TRUE, 5);
	gtk_widget_show (separator);
	break;
    
    case 3:

    /* This demonstrates the ability to use gtk_box_pack_end() to
	 * right justify widgets.  First, we create a new box as before. */
	box2 = make_box (FALSE, 0, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	/* create the label that will be put at the end. */
	label = gtk_label_new ("end");
	/* pack it using gtk_box_pack_end(), so it is put on the right side
	 * of the hbox created in the make_box() call. */
	gtk_box_pack_end (GTK_BOX (box2), label, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	/* show the label. */
	gtk_widget_show (label);
	
	/* pack box2 into box1 (the vbox remember ? :) */
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
	gtk_widget_show (box2);
	
	/* a separator for the bottom. */
	separator = gtk_hseparator_new ();
	/* this explicitly sets the separator to 400 pixels wide by 5 pixels
	 * high.  This is so the hbox we created will also be 400 pixels wide,
	 * and the "end" label will be separated from the other labels in the
	 * hbox.  Otherwise, all the widgets in the hbox would be packed as
	 * close together as possible. */
	gtk_widget_set_usize (separator, 400, 5);
	/* pack the separator into the vbox (box1) created near the start 
	 * of main() */
	gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), separator, FALSE, TRUE, 5);
	gtk_widget_show (separator);    
    }
    
    /* Create another new hbox.. remember we can use as many as we need! */
    quitbox = gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 0);
    
    /* Our quit button. */
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Quit");
    
    /* setup the signal to destroy the window.  Remember that this will send
     * the "destroy" signal to the window which will be caught by our signal
     * handler as defined above. */
    gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			       GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_main_quit),
			       GTK_OBJECT (window));
    /* pack the button into the quitbox.
     * The last 3 arguments to gtk_box_pack_start are: expand, fill, padding. */
    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (quitbox), button, TRUE, FALSE, 0);
    /* pack the quitbox into the vbox (box1) */
    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), quitbox, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
    
    /* pack the vbox (box1) which now contains all our widgets, into the
     * main window. */
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), box1);
    
    /* and show everything left */
    gtk_widget_show (button);
    gtk_widget_show (quitbox);
    
    gtk_widget_show (box1);
    /* Showing the window last so everything pops up at once. */
    gtk_widget_show (window);
    
    /* And of course, our main function. */
    gtk_main ();

    /* control returns here when gtk_main_quit() is called, but not when 
     * gtk_exit is used. */
    
    return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Packing Using Tables
<p>
Let's take a look at another way of packing - Tables.  These can be
extremely useful in certain situations.

Using tables, we create a grid that we can place widgets in.  The widgets
may take up as many spaces as we specify.

The first thing to look at of course, is the gtk_table_new function:

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_table_new (gint rows,
                          gint columns,
                          gint homogeneous);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
The first argument is the number of rows to make in the table, while the
second, obviously, the number of columns.

The homogeneous argument has to do with how the table's boxes are sized.  If homogeneous 
is TRUE, the table boxes are resized to the size of the largest widget in the table.
If homogeneous is FALSE, the size of a table boxes is dictated by the tallest widget 
in its same row, and the widest widget in its column.

The rows and columnts are laid out starting with 0 to n, where n was the
number specified in the call to gtk_table_new.  So, if you specify rows = 2 and 
columns = 2, the layout would look something like this:

<tscreen><verb>
 0          1          2
0+----------+----------+
 |          |          |
1+----------+----------+
 |          |          |
2+----------+----------+
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Note that the coordinate system starts in the upper left hand corner.  To place a 
widget into a box, use the following function:

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_table_attach (GtkTable      *table,
                       GtkWidget     *child,
		       gint           left_attach,
		       gint           right_attach,
		       gint           top_attach,
		       gint           bottom_attach,
		       gint           xoptions,
		       gint           yoptions,
		       gint           xpadding,
		       gint           ypadding);
</verb></tscreen>				       
<p>
Where the first argument ("table") is the table you've created and the second
("child") the widget you wish to place in the table.

The left and right attach 
arguments specify where to place the widget, and how many boxes to use.  If you want 
a button in the lower right table entry 
of our 2x2 table, and want it to fill that entry ONLY.  left_attach would be = 1, 
right_attach = 2, top_attach = 1, bottom_attach = 2.

Now, if you wanted a widget to take up the whole 
top row of our 2x2 table, you'd use left_attach = 0, right_attach =2, top_attach = 0, 
bottom_attach = 1.

The xoptions and yoptions are used to specify packing options and may be OR'ed 
together to allow multiple options.  

These options are:
<itemize>
<item>GTK_FILL - If the table box is larger than the widget, and GTK_FILL is
specified, the widget will expand to use all the room available.

<item>GTK_SHRINK - If the table widget was allocated less space then was
requested (usually by the user resizing the window), then the widgets would 
normally just be pushed off the bottom of
the window and disappear.  If GTK_SHRINK is specified, the widgets will
shrink with the table.

<item>GTK_EXPAND - This will cause the table to expand to use up any remaining
space in the window.
</itemize>

Padding is just like in boxes, creating a clear area around the widget
specified in pixels.  

gtk_table_attach() has a LOT of options.  So, there's a shortcut:

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_table_attach_defaults (GtkTable   *table,
                                GtkWidget  *widget,
				gint        left_attach,
				gint        right_attach,
				gint        top_attach,
				gint        bottom_attach);
</verb></tscreen>

The X and Y options default to GTK_FILL | GTK_EXPAND, and X and Y padding
are set to 0.  The rest of the arguments are identical to the previous
function.

We also have gtk_table_set_row_spacing() and gtk_table_set_col_spacing(). 
This places spacing between the rows at the specified row or column.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_table_set_row_spacing (GtkTable      *table,
                                gint           row,
				gint           spacing);
</verb></tscreen>
and
<tscreen><verb>
void       gtk_table_set_col_spacing  (GtkTable      *table,
                                       gint           column,
				       gint           spacing);
</verb></tscreen>

Note that for columns, the space goes to the right of the column, and for 
rows, the space goes below the row.

You can also set a consistent spacing of all rows and/or columns with:

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_table_set_row_spacings (GtkTable *table,
                                 gint      spacing);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
And,
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_table_set_col_spacings (GtkTable  *table,
                                 gint       spacing);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Note that with these calls, the last row and last column do not get any 
spacing.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Table Packing Example
<p>
Here we make a window with three buttons in a 2x2 table.
The first two buttons will be placed in the upper row.
A third, quit button, is placed in the lower row, spanning both columns.
Which means it should look something like this:
<p>
<? <CENTER> >
<?
<IMG SRC="gtk_tut_table.gif" VSPACE="15" HSPACE="10" 
ALT="Table Packing Example Image" WIDTH="180" HEIGHT="120">
>
<? </CENTER> >

Here's the source code:

<tscreen><verb>
/* table.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>

/* our callback.
 * the data passed to this function is printed to stdout */
void callback (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data)
{
    g_print ("Hello again - %s was pressed\n", (char *) data);
}

/* this callback quits the program */
void delete_event (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data)
{
    gtk_main_quit ();
}

int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
    GtkWidget *window;
    GtkWidget *button;
    GtkWidget *table;

    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);

    /* create a new window */
    window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);

    /* set the window title */
    gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Table");

    /* set a handler for delete_event that immediately
     * exits GTK. */
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
                        GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (delete_event), NULL);

    /* sets the border width of the window. */
    gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 20);

    /* create a 2x2 table */
    table = gtk_table_new (2, 2, TRUE);

    /* put the table in the main window */
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), table);

    /* create first button */
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("button 1");

    /* when the button is clicked, we call the "callback" function
     * with a pointer to "button 1" as it's argument */
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
              GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (callback), (gpointer) "button 1");


    /* insert button 1 into the upper left quadrant of the table */
    gtk_table_attach_defaults (GTK_TABLE(table), button, 0, 1, 0, 1);

    gtk_widget_show (button);

    /* create second button */

    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("button 2");

    /* when the button is clicked, we call the "callback" function
     * with a pointer to "button 2" as it's argument */
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
              GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (callback), (gpointer) "button 2");
    /* insert button 2 into the upper right quadrant of the table */
    gtk_table_attach_defaults (GTK_TABLE(table), button, 1, 2, 0, 1);

    gtk_widget_show (button);

    /* create "Quit" button */
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Quit");

    /* when the button is clicked, we call the "delete_event" function
     * and the program exits */
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
                        GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (delete_event), NULL);

    /* insert the quit button into the both 
     * lower quadrants of the table */
    gtk_table_attach_defaults (GTK_TABLE(table), button, 0, 2, 1, 2);

    gtk_widget_show (button);

    gtk_widget_show (table);
    gtk_widget_show (window);

    gtk_main ();

    return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Widget Overview
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<p>
The general steps to creating a widget in GTK are:
<enum>
<item> gtk_*_new - one of various functions to create a new widget.  These
are all detailed in this section.

<item> Connect all signals we wish to use to the appropriate handlers.

<item> Set the attributes of the widget.

<item> Pack the widget into a container using the appropriate call such as 
gtk_container_add() or gtk_box_pack_start().

<item> gtk_widget_show() the widget.
</enum>
<p>
gtk_widget_show() lets GTK know that we are done setting the attributes
of the widget, and it is ready to be displayed.  You may also use
gtk_widget_hide to make it disappear again.  The order in which you
show the widgets is not important, but I suggest showing the window
last so the whole window pops up at once rather than seeing the individual
widgets come up on the screen as they're formed.  The children of a widget
(a window is a widget too)
will not be displayed until the window itself is shown using the
gtk_widget_show() function.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Casting
<p>
You'll notice as you go on, that GTK uses a type casting system.  This is
always done using macros that both test the ability to cast the given item,
and perform the cast.  Some common ones you will see are:

<itemize>
<item> GTK_WIDGET(widget)
<item> GTK_OBJECT(object)
<item> GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(function)
<item> GTK_CONTAINER(container)
<item> GTK_WINDOW(window)
<item> GTK_BOX(box)
</itemize>

These are all used to cast arguments in functions.  You'll see them in the
examples, and can usually tell when to use them simply by looking at the
function's declaration.

As you can see below in the class hierarchy, all GtkWidgets are derived from
the GtkObject base class.  This means you can use an widget in any place the 
function asks for an object - simply use the GTK_OBJECT() macro.

For example:

<tscreen><verb>
gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(button), "clicked",
                   GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(callback_function), callback_data);
</verb></tscreen> 

This casts the button into an object, and provides a cast for the function
pointer to the callback.

Many widgets are also containers.  If you look in the class hierarchy below,
you'll notice that many widgets drive from the GtkContainer class.  Any one
of those widgets may use with the GTK_CONTAINER macro to
pass them to functions that ask for containers.

Unfortunately, these macros are not extensively covered in the tutorial, but I
recomend taking a look through the GTK header files.  It can be very
educational.  In fact, it's not difficult to learn how a widget works just
by looking at the function declarations.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Widget Hierarchy
<p>
For your reference, here is the class hierarchy tree used to implement widgets.

<tscreen><verb>
  GtkObject
   +GtkData
   | +GtkAdjustment
   | `GtkTooltips
   `GtkWidget
     +GtkContainer
     | +GtkBin
     | | +GtkAlignment
     | | +GtkEventBox
     | | +GtkFrame
     | | | `GtkAspectFrame
     | | +GtkHandleBox
     | | +GtkItem
     | | | +GtkListItem
     | | | +GtkMenuItem
     | | | | `GtkCheckMenuItem
     | | | |   `GtkRadioMenuItem
     | | | `GtkTreeItem
     | | +GtkViewport
     | | `GtkWindow
     | |   +GtkColorSelectionDialog
     | |   +GtkDialog
     | |   | `GtkInputDialog
     | |   `GtkFileSelection
     | +GtkBox
     | | +GtkButtonBox
     | | | +GtkHButtonBox
     | | | `GtkVButtonBox
     | | +GtkHBox
     | | | +GtkCombo
     | | | `GtkStatusbar
     | | `GtkVBox
     | |   +GtkColorSelection
     | |   `GtkGammaCurve
     | +GtkButton
     | | +GtkOptionMenu
     | | `GtkToggleButton
     | |   `GtkCheckButton
     | |     `GtkRadioButton
     | +GtkCList
     | +GtkFixed
     | +GtkList
     | +GtkMenuShell
     | | +GtkMenuBar
     | | `GtkMenu
     | +GtkNotebook
     | +GtkPaned
     | | +GtkHPaned
     | | `GtkVPaned
     | +GtkScrolledWindow
     | +GtkTable
     | +GtkToolbar
     | `GtkTree
     +GtkDrawingArea
     | `GtkCurve
     +GtkEditable
     | +GtkEntry
     | | `GtkSpinButton
     | `GtkText
     +GtkMisc
     | +GtkArrow
     | +GtkImage
     | +GtkLabel
     | | `GtkTipsQuery
     | `GtkPixmap
     +GtkPreview
     +GtkProgressBar
     +GtkRange
     | +GtkScale
     | | +GtkHScale
     | | `GtkVScale
     | `GtkScrollbar
     |   +GtkHScrollbar
     |   `GtkVScrollbar
     +GtkRuler
     | +GtkHRuler
     | `GtkVRuler
     `GtkSeparator
       +GtkHSeparator
       `GtkVSeparator
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Widgets Without Windows
<p>
The following widgets do not have an associated window.  If you want to
capture events, you'll have to use the GtkEventBox.  See the section on   
<ref id="sec_The_EventBox_Widget" name="The EventBox Widget">

<tscreen><verb>
GtkAlignment
GtkArrow
GtkBin
GtkBox
GtkImage
GtkItem
GtkLabel
GtkPixmap
GtkScrolledWindow
GtkSeparator
GtkTable
GtkAspectFrame
GtkFrame
GtkVBox
GtkHBox
GtkVSeparator
GtkHSeparator
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
We'll further our exploration of GTK by examining each widget in turn,
creating a few simple functions to display them.  Another good source is
the testgtk.c program that comes with GTK.  It can be found in
gtk/testgtk.c.

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>The Button Widget
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Normal Buttons
<p>
We've almost seen all there is to see of the button widget.  It's pretty
simple.  There is however two ways to create a button.	You can use the
gtk_button_new_with_label() to create a button with a label, or use
gtk_button_new() to create a blank button.  It's then up to you to pack a
label or pixmap into this new button.  To do this, create a new box, and
then pack your objects into this box using the usual gtk_box_pack_start,
and then use gtk_container_add to pack the box into the button.
<p>
Here's an example of using gtk_button_new to create a button with a
picture and a label in it.  I've broken the code to create a box up from
the rest so you can use it in your programs.

<tscreen><verb>
/* buttons.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>

/* create a new hbox with an image and a label packed into it
 * and return the box.. */

GtkWidget *xpm_label_box (GtkWidget *parent, gchar *xpm_filename, gchar *label_text)
{
    GtkWidget *box1;
    GtkWidget *label;
    GtkWidget *pixmapwid;
    GdkPixmap *pixmap;
    GdkBitmap *mask;
    GtkStyle *style;

    /* create box for xpm and label */
    box1 = gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 0);
    gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (box1), 2);

    /* get style of button.. I assume it's to get the background color.
     * if someone knows the real reason, please enlighten me. */
    style = gtk_widget_get_style(parent);

    /* now on to the xpm stuff.. load xpm */
    pixmap = gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm (parent->window, &amp;mask,
					 &amp;style->bg[GTK_STATE_NORMAL],
					 xpm_filename);
    pixmapwid = gtk_pixmap_new (pixmap, mask);

    /* create label for button */
    label = gtk_label_new (label_text);

    /* pack the pixmap and label into the box */
    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1),
			pixmapwid, FALSE, FALSE, 3);

    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), label, FALSE, FALSE, 3);

    gtk_widget_show(pixmapwid);
    gtk_widget_show(label);

    return (box1);
}

/* our usual callback function */
void callback (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data)
{
    g_print ("Hello again - %s was pressed\n", (char *) data);
}


int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
    /* GtkWidget is the storage type for widgets */
    GtkWidget *window;
    GtkWidget *button;
    GtkWidget *box1;

    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);

    /* create a new window */
    window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);

    gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Pixmap'd Buttons!");

    /* It's a good idea to do this for all windows. */
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_exit), NULL);

    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_exit), NULL);


    /* sets the border width of the window. */
    gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
    gtk_widget_realize(window);

    /* create a new button */
    button = gtk_button_new ();

    /* You should be getting used to seeing most of these functions by now */
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (callback), (gpointer) "cool button");

    /* this calls our box creating function */
    box1 = xpm_label_box(window, "info.xpm", "cool button");

    /* pack and show all our widgets */
    gtk_widget_show(box1);

    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (button), box1);

    gtk_widget_show(button);

    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), button);

    gtk_widget_show (window);

    /* rest in gtk_main and wait for the fun to begin! */
    gtk_main ();

    return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>

The xpm_label_box function could be used to pack xpm's and labels into any
widget that can be a container.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Toggle Buttons
<p>
Toggle buttons are very similar to normal buttons, except they will always
be in one of two states, alternated by a click.  They may be depressed, and
when you click again, they will pop back up.  Click again, and they will pop
back down. 

Toggle buttons are the basis for check buttons and radio buttons, as such,
many of the calls used for toggle buttons are inherited by radio and check
buttons.  I will point these out when we come to them.

Creating a new toggle button:

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_toggle_button_new (void);

GtkWidget* gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label (gchar *label);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
As you can imagine, these work identically to the normal button widget
calls.  The first creates a blank toggle button, and the second, a button 
with a label widget already packed into it.
<p>
To retrieve the state of the toggle widget, including radio and check
buttons, we use a macro as shown in our example below.  This tests the state
of the toggle in a callback.  The signal of interest emitted to us by toggle
buttons (the toggle button, check button, and radio button widgets), is the
"toggled" signal.  To check the state of these buttons, set up a signal
handler to catch the toggled signal, and use the macro to determine it's
state.  The callback will look something like:

<tscreen><verb>
void toggle_button_callback (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer   data)
{
    if (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON (widget)->active) 
    {
        /* If control reaches here, the toggle button is down */
    
    } else {
    
        /* If control reaches here, the toggle button is up */
    }
}
</verb></tscreen>

<!--

COMMENTED!

<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_toggle_button_get_type (void);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
No idea... they all have this, but I dunno what it is :)


<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_toggle_button_set_mode (GtkToggleButton *toggle_button,
                                 gint draw_indicator);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
No idea.
-->

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_toggle_button_set_state (GtkToggleButton *toggle_button,
                                  gint state);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
The above call can be used to set the state of the toggle button, and it's
children the radio and check buttons.  Passing
in your created button as the first argument, and a TRUE or FALSE
for the second state argument to specify whether it should be up (released) or
down (depressed).  Default is up, or FALSE.

Note that when you use the gtk_toggle_button_set_state() function, and the
state is actually changed, it causes
the "clicked" signal to be emitted from the button.

<tscreen><verb>
void       gtk_toggle_button_toggled        (GtkToggleButton *toggle_button);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
This simply toggles the button, and emits the "toggled" signal.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Check Buttons
<p>
Check buttons inherent many properties and functions from the the toggle buttons above, 
but look a little
different.  Rather than being buttons with text inside them, they are small
squares with the text to the right of them.  These are often seen for
toggling options on and off in applications.

The two creation functions are the same as for the normal button.

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_check_button_new (void);

GtkWidget* gtk_check_button_new_with_label (gchar *label);
</verb></tscreen>

The new_with_label function creates a check button with a label beside it.

Checking the state of the check button is identical to that of the toggle
button.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Radio Buttons
<p>
Radio buttons are similar to check buttons except they are grouped so that
only one may be selected/depressed at a time.  This is good for places in
your application where you need to select from a short list of options.

Creating a new radio button is done with one of these calls:

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_radio_button_new (GSList *group);

GtkWidget* gtk_radio_button_new_with_label (GSList *group,
                                            gchar *label);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
You'll notice the extra argument to these calls.  They require a group to
perform they're duty properly.  The first call should pass NULL as the first
argument.  Then create a group using:

<tscreen><verb>
GSList* gtk_radio_button_group (GtkRadioButton *radio_button);
</verb></tscreen>

<p>
The important thing to remember is that gtk_radio_button_group must be
called for each new button added to the group, with the previous button
passed in as an argument. The result is then passed into the call to
gtk_radio_button_new or gtk_radio_button_new_with_label. This allows a
chain of buttons to be established. The example below should make this
clear.

It is also a good idea to explicitly set which button should be the 
default depressed button with:

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_toggle_button_set_state (GtkToggleButton *toggle_button,
                                  gint state);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
This is described in the section on toggle buttons, and works in exactly the
same way.
<p>
The following example creates a radio button group with three buttons.

<tscreen><verb>
/* radiobuttons.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>
#include <glib.h>

void close_application( GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data ) {
  gtk_main_quit();
}

main(int argc,char *argv[])
{
  static GtkWidget *window = NULL;
  GtkWidget *box1;
  GtkWidget *box2;
  GtkWidget *button;
  GtkWidget *separator;
  GSList *group;
  
  gtk_init(&amp;argc,&amp;argv);          
  window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
  
  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
		      GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(close_application),
		      NULL);

  gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "radio buttons");
  gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 0);

  box1 = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 0);
  gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), box1);
  gtk_widget_show (box1);

  box2 = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 10);
  gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (box2), 10);
  gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
  gtk_widget_show (box2);

  button = gtk_radio_button_new_with_label (NULL, "button1");
  gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
  gtk_widget_show (button);

  group = gtk_radio_button_group (GTK_RADIO_BUTTON (button));
  button = gtk_radio_button_new_with_label(group, "button2");
  gtk_toggle_button_set_state (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON (button), TRUE);
  gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
  gtk_widget_show (button);

  group = gtk_radio_button_group (GTK_RADIO_BUTTON (button));
  button = gtk_radio_button_new_with_label(group, "button3");
  gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
  gtk_widget_show (button);

  separator = gtk_hseparator_new ();
  gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), separator, FALSE, TRUE, 0);
  gtk_widget_show (separator);

  box2 = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 10);
  gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (box2), 10);
  gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, TRUE, 0);
  gtk_widget_show (box2);

  button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("close");
  gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			     GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(close_application),
			     GTK_OBJECT (window));
  gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
  GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS (button, GTK_CAN_DEFAULT);
  gtk_widget_grab_default (button);
  gtk_widget_show (button);
  gtk_widget_show (window);
     
  gtk_main();
  return(0);
}
</verb></tscreen>

You can shorten this slightly by using the following syntax, which
removes the need for a variable to hold the list of buttons:

<tscreen><verb>
     button2 = gtk_radio_button_new_with_label(
                 gtk_radio_button_group (GTK_RADIO_BUTTON (button1)),
                 "button2");
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> Miscallaneous Widgets
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Labels
<p>
Labels are used a lot in GTK, and are relatively simple.  Labels emit no
signals as they do not have an associated X window.  If you need to catch
signals, or do clipping, use the EventBox widget.

To create a new label, use:

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_label_new (char *str);
</verb></tscreen>

Where the sole argument is the string you wish the label to display.

To change the label's text after creation, use the function:

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_label_set (GtkLabel  *label,
		    char      *str);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Where the first argument is the label you created previously (casted using
the GTK_LABEL() macro), and the second is the new string.

The space needed for the new string will be automatically adjusted if needed.

To retrieve the current string, use:

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_label_get (GtkLabel  *label,
		    char     **str);
</verb></tscreen>

Where the first arguement is the label you've created, and the second, the
return for the string.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>The Tooltips Widget
<p>
These are the little text strings that pop up when you leave your pointer
over a button or other widget for a few seconds.  They are easy to use, so I
will just explain them without giving an example.  If you want to see some
code, take a look at the testgtk.c program distributed with GDK.
<p>
Some widgets (such as the label) will not work with tooltips.
<p>
The first call you will use to create a new tooltip.  You only need to do
this once in a given function.	The GtkTooltip this function returns can be
used to create multiple tooltips.

<tscreen><verb>
GtkTooltips *gtk_tooltips_new (void);
</verb></tscreen>

Once you have created a new tooltip, and the widget you wish to use it on,
simply use this call to set it.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tooltips_set_tips   (GtkTooltips *tooltips,
			      GtkWidget   *widget,
			      gchar	  *tips_text);
</verb></tscreen>

The first argument is the tooltip you've already created, followed by the
widget you wish to have this tooltip pop up for, and the text you wish it to
say.
<p>
Here's a short example:

<tscreen><verb>
GtkTooltips *tooltips;
GtkWidget *button;
...
tooltips = gtk_tooltips_new ();
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("button 1");
...
gtk_tooltips_set_tips (tooltips, button, "This is button 1");
</verb></tscreen>


There are other calls used with tooltips.  I will just list them with a
brief description of what they do.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tooltips_destroy    (GtkTooltips *tooltips);
</verb></tscreen>

Destroy the created tooltips.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tooltips_enable     (GtkTooltips *tooltips);
</verb></tscreen>

Enable a disabled set of tooltips.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tooltips_disable    (GtkTooltips *tooltips);
</verb></tscreen>

Disable an enabled set of tooltips.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tooltips_set_delay  (GtkTooltips *tooltips,
			      gint	   delay);

</verb></tscreen>
Sets how many milliseconds you have to hold you pointer over the widget before the
tooltip will pop up.  The default is 1000 milliseconds or 1 second.

<tscreen><verb>
void	  gtk_tooltips_set_tips (GtkTooltips *tooltips,
			         GtkWidget   *widget,
			         gchar	  *tips_text);
</verb></tscreen>

Change the tooltip text of an already created tooltip.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tooltips_set_colors (GtkTooltips *tooltips,
			      GdkColor	  *background,
			      GdkColor	  *foreground);
</verb></tscreen>

Set the foreground and background color of the tooltips.  Again, I have no
idea how to specify the colors.
<p>
And that's all the functions associated with tooltips.  More than you'll
ever want to know :)

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Progress Bars
<p>
Progress bars are used to show the status of an operation.  They are pretty 
easy to use, as you will see with the code below. But first lets start out 
with the call to create a new progress bar.

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_progress_bar_new (void);
</verb></tscreen>

Now that the progress bar has been created we can use it.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_progress_bar_update (GtkProgressBar *pbar, gfloat percentage);
</verb></tscreen>

The first argument is the progress bar you wish to operate on, and the second 
argument is the amount 'completed', meaning the amount the progress bar has 
been filled from 0-100% (a real number between 0 and 1).

Progress Bars are usually used with timeouts or other such functions (see
section on <ref id="sec_timeouts" name="Timeouts, I/O and Idle Functions">) 
to give the illusion of multitasking.  All will employ 
the gtk_progress_bar_update function in the same manner.

Here is an example of the progress bar, updated using timeouts.  This 
code also shows you how to reset the Progress Bar.

<tscreen><verb>
/* progressbar.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>

static int ptimer = 0;
int pstat = TRUE;

/* This function increments and updates the progress bar, it also resets
 the progress bar if pstat is FALSE */
gint progress (gpointer data)
{
    gfloat pvalue;
    
    /* get the current value of the progress bar */
    pvalue = GTK_PROGRESS_BAR (data)->percentage;
    
    if ((pvalue >= 1.0) || (pstat == FALSE)) {
	pvalue = 0.0;
	pstat = TRUE;
    }
    pvalue += 0.01;
    
    gtk_progress_bar_update (GTK_PROGRESS_BAR (data), pvalue);
    
    return TRUE;
}

/* This function signals a reset of the progress bar */
void progress_r (void)
{  
    pstat = FALSE;  
}

void destroy (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data)
{
    gtk_main_quit ();
}

int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
    GtkWidget *window;
    GtkWidget *button;
    GtkWidget *label;
    GtkWidget *table;
    GtkWidget *pbar;
    
    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
    
    window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
    
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (destroy), NULL);
    
    gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
    
    table = gtk_table_new(3,2,TRUE);
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), table);
    
    label = gtk_label_new ("Progress Bar Example");
    gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), label, 0,2,0,1);
    gtk_widget_show(label);
    
    /* Create a new progress bar, pack it into the table, and show it */
    pbar = gtk_progress_bar_new ();
    gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), pbar, 0,2,1,2);
    gtk_widget_show (pbar);
    
    /* Set the timeout to handle automatic updating of the progress bar */
    ptimer = gtk_timeout_add (100, progress, pbar);
    
    /* This button signals the progress bar to be reset */
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Reset");
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (progress_r), NULL);
    gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), button, 0,1,2,3);
    gtk_widget_show(button);
    
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Cancel");
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (destroy), NULL);
    
    gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), button, 1,2,2,3);
    gtk_widget_show (button);
    
    gtk_widget_show(table);
    gtk_widget_show(window);
    
    gtk_main ();
    
    return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>

In this small program there are four areas that concern the general operation
of Progress Bars, we will look at them in the order they are called.

<tscreen><verb>
pbar = gtk_progress_bar_new ();
</verb></tscreen>

This code creates a new progress bar, called pbar.

<tscreen><verb>
ptimer = gtk_timeout_add (100, progress, pbar);
</verb></tscreen>

This code, uses timeouts to enable a constant time interval, timeouts are 
not necessary in the use of Progress Bars. 

<tscreen><verb>
pvalue = GTK_PROGRESS_BAR (data)->percentage;
</verb></tscreen>

This code assigns the current value of the percentage bar to pvalue.

<tscreen><verb>
gtk_progress_bar_update (GTK_PROGRESS_BAR (data), pvalue);
</verb></tscreen>

Finally, this code updates the progress bar with the value of pvalue

And that is all there is to know about Progress Bars, enjoy.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Dialogs
<p>

The Dialog widget is very simple, and is actually just a window with a few
things pre-packed into it for you.  The structure for a Dialog is:

<tscreen><verb>
struct GtkDialog
{
      GtkWindow window;
    
      GtkWidget *vbox;
      GtkWidget *action_area;
};
</verb></tscreen>

So you see, it simple creates a window, and then packs a vbox into the top,
then a seperator, and then an hbox for the "action_area".

The Dialog widget can be used for pop-up messages to the user, and 
other similar tasks.  It is really basic, and there is only one 
function for the dialog box, which is:

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_dialog_new (void);
</verb></tscreen>

So to create a new dialog box, use,

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget window;
window = gtk_dialog_new ();
</verb></tscreen>

This will create the dialog box, and it is now up to you to use it.
you could pack a button in the action_area by doing something like so:

<tscreen><verb>
button = ...
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (GTK_DIALOG (window)->action_area), button,
		    TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (button);
</verb></tscreen>

And you could add to the vbox area by packing, for instance, a label 
in it, try something like this:

<tscreen><verb>
label = gtk_label_new ("Dialogs are groovy");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (GTK_DIALOG (window)->vbox), label, TRUE,
		    TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (label);
</verb></tscreen>

As an example in using the dialog box, you could put two buttons in 
the action_area, a Cancel button and an Ok button, and a label in the vbox 
area, asking the user a question or giving an error etc.  Then you could 
attach a different signal to each of the buttons and perform the 
operation the user selects.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Pixmaps
<p>
Pixmaps are data structures that contain pictures.  These pictures can be
used in various places, but most visibly as icons on the X-Windows desktop,
or as cursors.  A bitmap is a 2-color pixmap.

To use pixmaps in GTK, we must first build a GdkPixmap structure using
routines from the GDK layer.  Pixmaps can either be created from in-memory
data, or from data read from a file.  We'll go through each of the calls
to create a pixmap.

<tscreen><verb>
GdkPixmap *gdk_bitmap_create_from_data( GdkWindow *window,
                                        gchar     *data,
                                        gint      width,
                                        gint      height );
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
This routine is used to create a single-plane pixmap (2 colors) from data in
memory.  Each bit of the data represents whether that pixel is off or on.
Width and height are in pixels.  The GdkWindow pointer is to the current
window, since a pixmap resources are meaningful only in the context of the
screen where it is to be displayed.

<tscreen><verb>
GdkPixmap* gdk_pixmap_create_from_data( GdkWindow  *window,
                                        gchar      *data,
                                        gint        width,
                                        gint        height,
                                        gint        depth,
                                        GdkColor   *fg,
                                        GdkColor   *bg );
</verb></tscreen>

This is used to create a pixmap of the given depth (number of colors) from
the bitmap data specified.  fg and bg are the foreground and background
color to use.

<tscreen><verb>
GdkPixmap* gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm( GdkWindow  *window,
                                       GdkBitmap **mask,
                                       GdkColor   *transparent_color,
                                       const gchar *filename );
</verb></tscreen>

XPM format is a readable pixmap representation for the X Window System.  It
is widely used and many different utilities are available for creating image
files in this format.  The file specified by filename must contain an image
in that format and it is loaded into the pixmap structure.  The mask specifies
what bits of the pixmap are opaque.  All other bits are colored using the
color specified by transparent_color.  An example using this follows below.  

<tscreen><verb>
GdkPixmap* gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm_d (GdkWindow  *window,
                                         GdkBitmap **mask,
                                         GdkColor   *transparent_color,
                                         gchar     **data);
</verb></tscreen>

Small images can be incorporated into a program as data in the XPM format.
A pixmap is created using this data, instead of reading it from a file.
An example of such data is

<tscreen><verb>
/* XPM */
static const char * xpm_data[] = {
"16 16 3 1",
"       c None",
".      c #000000000000",
"X      c #FFFFFFFFFFFF",
"                ",
"   ......       ",
"   .XXX.X.      ",
"   .XXX.XX.     ",
"   .XXX.XXX.    ",
"   .XXX.....    ",
"   .XXXXXXX.    ",
"   .XXXXXXX.    ",
"   .XXXXXXX.    ",
"   .XXXXXXX.    ",
"   .XXXXXXX.    ",
"   .XXXXXXX.    ",
"   .XXXXXXX.    ",
"   .........    ",
"                ",
"                "};
</verb></tscreen>

<tscreen><verb>
void gdk_pixmap_destroy( GdkPixmap  *pixmap );
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
When we're done using a pixmap and not likely to reuse it again soon,
it is a good idea to release the resource using gdk_pixmap_destroy.  Pixmaps
should be considered a precious resource.


Once we've created a pixmap, we can display it as a GTK widget.  We must
create a pixmap widget to contain the GDK pixmap.  This is done using

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_pixmap_new( GdkPixmap  *pixmap,
                           GdkBitmap  *mask );
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
The other pixmap widget calls are

<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_pixmap_get_type( void );
void  gtk_pixmap_set( GtkPixmap  *pixmap,
                      GdkPixmap  *val,
                      GdkBitmap  *mask);
void  gtk_pixmap_get( GtkPixmap  *pixmap,
                      GdkPixmap **val,
                      GdkBitmap **mask);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
gtk_pixmap_set is used to change the pixmap that the widget is currently
managing.  Val is the pixmap created using GDK.

The following is an example of using a pixmap in a button.

<tscreen><verb>
/* pixmap.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>


/* XPM data of Open-File icon */
static const char * xpm_data[] = {
"16 16 3 1",
"       c None",
".      c #000000000000",
"X      c #FFFFFFFFFFFF",
"                ",
"   ......       ",
"   .XXX.X.      ",
"   .XXX.XX.     ",
"   .XXX.XXX.    ",
"   .XXX.....    ",
"   .XXXXXXX.    ",
"   .XXXXXXX.    ",
"   .XXXXXXX.    ",
"   .XXXXXXX.    ",
"   .XXXXXXX.    ",
"   .XXXXXXX.    ",
"   .XXXXXXX.    ",
"   .........    ",
"                ",
"                "};


/* when invoked (via signal delete_event), terminates the application.
 */
void close_application( GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data ) {
    gtk_main_quit();
}


/* is invoked when the button is clicked.  It just prints a message.
 */
void button_clicked( GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data ) {
    printf( "button clicked\n" );
}

int main( int argc, char *argv[] )
{
    /* GtkWidget is the storage type for widgets */
    GtkWidget *window, *pixmapwid, *button;
    GdkPixmap *pixmap;
    GdkBitmap *mask;
    GtkStyle *style;
    
    /* create the main window, and attach delete_event signal to terminating
       the application */
    gtk_init( &amp;argc, &amp;argv );
    window = gtk_window_new( GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL );
    gtk_signal_connect( GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
                        GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (close_application), NULL );
    gtk_container_border_width( GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10 );
    gtk_widget_show( window );

    /* now for the pixmap from gdk */
    style = gtk_widget_get_style( window );
    pixmap = gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm_d( window->window,  &amp;mask,
                                           &amp;style->bg[GTK_STATE_NORMAL],
                                           (gchar **)xpm_data );

    /* a pixmap widget to contain the pixmap */
    pixmapwid = gtk_pixmap_new( pixmap, mask );
    gtk_widget_show( pixmapwid );

    /* a button to contain the pixmap widget */
    button = gtk_button_new();
    gtk_container_add( GTK_CONTAINER(button), pixmapwid );
    gtk_container_add( GTK_CONTAINER(window), button );
    gtk_widget_show( button );

    gtk_signal_connect( GTK_OBJECT(button), "clicked",
                        GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_clicked), NULL );

    /* show the window */
    gtk_main ();
          
    return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>


To load a file from an XPM data file called icon0.xpm in the current
directory, we would have created the pixmap thus

<tscreen><verb>
    /* load a pixmap from a file */
    pixmap = gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm( window->window, &amp;mask,
                                         &amp;style->bg[GTK_STATE_NORMAL],
                                         "./icon0.xpm" );
    pixmapwid = gtk_pixmap_new( pixmap, mask );
    gtk_widget_show( pixmapwid );
    gtk_container_add( GTK_CONTAINER(window), pixmapwid );
</verb></tscreen>



Using Shapes
<p>
A disadvantage of using pixmaps is that the displayed object is always
rectangular, regardless of the image.  We would like to create desktops
and applications with icons that have more natural shapes.  For example,
for a game interface, we would like to have round buttons to push.  The
way to do this is using shaped windows.

A shaped window is simply a pixmap where the background pixels are
transparent.  This way, when the background image is multi-colored, we
don't overwrite it with a rectangular, non-matching border around our
icon.  The following example displays a full wheelbarrow image on the
desktop.

<tscreen><verb>
/* wheelbarrow.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>

/* XPM */
static char * WheelbarrowFull_xpm[] = {
"48 48 64 1",
"       c None",
".      c #DF7DCF3CC71B",
"X      c #965875D669A6",
"o      c #71C671C671C6",
"O      c #A699A289A699",
"+      c #965892489658",
"@      c #8E38410330C2",
"#      c #D75C7DF769A6",
"$      c #F7DECF3CC71B",
"%      c #96588A288E38",
"&amp;      c #A69992489E79",
"*      c #8E3886178E38",
"=      c #104008200820",
"-      c #596510401040",
";      c #C71B30C230C2",
":      c #C71B9A699658",
">      c #618561856185",
",      c #20811C712081",
"<      c #104000000000",
"1      c #861720812081",
"2      c #DF7D4D344103",
"3      c #79E769A671C6",
"4      c #861782078617",
"5      c #41033CF34103",
"6      c #000000000000",
"7      c #49241C711040",
"8      c #492445144924",
"9      c #082008200820",
"0      c #69A618611861",
"q      c #B6DA71C65144",
"w      c #410330C238E3",
"e      c #CF3CBAEAB6DA",
"r      c #71C6451430C2",
"t      c #EFBEDB6CD75C",
"y      c #28A208200820",
"u      c #186110401040",
"i      c #596528A21861",
"p      c #71C661855965",
"a      c #A69996589658",
"s      c #30C228A230C2",
"d      c #BEFBA289AEBA",
"f      c #596545145144",
"g      c #30C230C230C2",
"h      c #8E3882078617",
"j      c #208118612081",
"k      c #38E30C300820",
"l      c #30C2208128A2",
"z      c #38E328A238E3",
"x      c #514438E34924",
"c      c #618555555965",
"v      c #30C2208130C2",
"b      c #38E328A230C2",
"n      c #28A228A228A2",
"m      c #41032CB228A2",
"M      c #104010401040",
"N      c #492438E34103",
"B      c #28A2208128A2",
"V      c #A699596538E3",
"C      c #30C21C711040",
"Z      c #30C218611040",
"A      c #965865955965",
"S      c #618534D32081",
"D      c #38E31C711040",
"F      c #082000000820",
"                                                ",
"          .XoO                                  ",
"         +@#$%o&amp;                                ",
"         *=-;#::o+                              ",
"           >,<12#:34                            ",
"             45671#:X3                          ",
"               +89<02qwo                        ",
"e*                >,67;ro                       ",
"ty>                 459@>+&amp;&amp;                    ",
"$2u+                  ><ipas8*                  ",
"%$;=*                *3:.Xa.dfg>                ",
"Oh$;ya             *3d.a8j,Xe.d3g8+             ",
" Oh$;ka          *3d$a8lz,,xxc:.e3g54           ",
"  Oh$;kO       *pd$%svbzz,sxxxxfX..&amp;wn>         ",
"   Oh$@mO    *3dthwlsslszjzxxxxxxx3:td8M4       ",
"    Oh$@g&amp; *3d$XNlvvvlllm,mNwxxxxxxxfa.:,B*     ",
"     Oh$@,Od.czlllllzlmmqV@V#V@fxxxxxxxf:%j5&amp;   ",
"      Oh$1hd5lllslllCCZrV#r#:#2AxxxxxxxxxcdwM*  ",
"       OXq6c.%8vvvllZZiqqApA:mq:Xxcpcxxxxxfdc9* ",
"        2r<6gde3bllZZrVi7S@SV77A::qApxxxxxxfdcM ",
"        :,q-6MN.dfmZZrrSS:#riirDSAX@Af5xxxxxfevo",
"         +A26jguXtAZZZC7iDiCCrVVii7Cmmmxxxxxx%3g",
"          *#16jszN..3DZZZZrCVSA2rZrV7Dmmwxxxx&amp;en",
"           p2yFvzssXe:fCZZCiiD7iiZDiDSSZwwxx8e*>",
"           OA1<jzxwwc:$d%NDZZZZCCCZCCZZCmxxfd.B ",
"            3206Bwxxszx%et.eaAp77m77mmmf3&amp;eeeg* ",
"             @26MvzxNzvlbwfpdettttttttttt.c,n&amp;  ",
"             *;16=lsNwwNwgsvslbwwvccc3pcfu<o    ",
"              p;<69BvwwsszslllbBlllllllu<5+     ",
"              OS0y6FBlvvvzvzss,u=Blllj=54       ",
"               c1-699Blvlllllu7k96MMMg4         ",
"               *10y8n6FjvllllB<166668           ",
"                S-kg+>666<M<996-y6n<8*          ",
"                p71=4 m69996kD8Z-66698&amp;&amp;        ",
"                &amp;i0ycm6n4 ogk17,0<6666g         ",
"                 N-k-<>     >=01-kuu666>        ",
"                 ,6ky&amp;      &amp;46-10ul,66,        ",
"                 Ou0<>       o66y<ulw<66&amp;       ",
"                  *kk5       >66By7=xu664       ",
"                   <<M4      466lj<Mxu66o       ",
"                   *>>       +66uv,zN666*       ",
"                              566,xxj669        ",
"                              4666FF666>        ",
"                               >966666M         ",
"                                oM6668+         ",
"                                  *4            ",
"                                                ",
"                                                "};


/* when invoked (via signal delete_event), terminates the application.
 */
void close_application( GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data ) {
    gtk_main_quit();
}

int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
    /* GtkWidget is the storage type for widgets */
    GtkWidget *window, *pixmap, *fixed;
    GdkPixmap *gdk_pixmap;
    GdkBitmap *mask;
    GtkStyle *style;
    GdkGC *gc;
    
    /* create the main window, and attach delete_event signal to terminate
       the application.  Note that the main window will not have a titlebar
       since we're making it a popup. */
    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
    window = gtk_window_new( GTK_WINDOW_POPUP );
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
                        GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (close_application), NULL);
    gtk_widget_show (window);

    /* now for the pixmap and the pixmap widget */
    style = gtk_widget_get_default_style();
    gc = style->black_gc;
    gdk_pixmap = gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm_d( window->window, &amp;mask,
                                             &amp;style->bg[GTK_STATE_NORMAL],
                                             WheelbarrowFull_xpm );
    pixmap = gtk_pixmap_new( gdk_pixmap, mask );
    gtk_widget_show( pixmap );

    /* To display the pixmap, we use a fixed widget to place the pixmap */
    fixed = gtk_fixed_new();
    gtk_widget_set_usize( fixed, 200, 200 );
    gtk_fixed_put( GTK_FIXED(fixed), pixmap, 0, 0 );
    gtk_container_add( GTK_CONTAINER(window), fixed );
    gtk_widget_show( fixed );

    /* This masks out everything except for the image itself */
    gtk_widget_shape_combine_mask( window, mask, 0, 0 );
    
    /* show the window */
    gtk_widget_set_uposition( window, 20, 400 );
    gtk_widget_show( window );
    gtk_main ();
          
    return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
To make the wheelbarrow image sensitive, we could attach the button press
event signal to make it do something.  The following few lines would make
the picture sensitive to a mouse button being pressed which makes the
application terminate.

<tscreen><verb>
gtk_widget_set_events( window,
                       gtk_widget_get_events( window ) |
		       GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK );

gtk_signal_connect( GTK_OBJECT(window), "button_press_event",
                    GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(close_application), NULL );
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Rulers
<p>
Ruler widgets are used to indicate the location of the mouse pointer
in a given window.  A window can have a vertical ruler spanning across
the width and a horizontal ruler spanning down the height.  A small
triangular indicator on the ruler shows the exact location of the
pointer relative to the ruler.

A ruler must first be created.  Horizontal and vertical rulers are
created using

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_hruler_new(void);    /* horizontal ruler */
GtkWidget *gtk_vruler_new(void);    /* vertical ruler   */
</verb></tscreen>

Once a ruler is created, we can define the unit of measurement.  Units
of measure for rulers can be GTK_PIXELS, GTK_INCHES or
GTK_CENTIMETERS.  This is set using

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_ruler_set_metric( GtkRuler        *ruler,
                           GtkMetricType   metric );
</verb></tscreen>

The default measure is GTK_PIXELS.

<tscreen><verb>
gtk_ruler_set_metric( GTK_RULER(ruler), GTK_PIXELS );
</verb></tscreen>

Other important characteristics of a ruler are how to mark the units
of scale and where the position indicator is initially placed.  These
are set for a ruler using

<tscreen><verb>
void  gtk_ruler_set_range  (GtkRuler       *ruler,
                            gfloat          lower,
                            gfloat          upper,
                            gfloat          position,
                            gfloat          max_size);
</verb></tscreen>

The lower and upper arguments define the extents of the ruler, and
max_size is the largest possible number that will be displayed.
Position defines the initial position of the pointer indicator within
the ruler.

A vertical ruler can span an 800 pixel wide window thus

<tscreen><verb>
gtk_ruler_set_range( GTK_RULER(vruler), 0, 800, 0, 800);
</verb></tscreen>

The markings displayed on the ruler will be from 0 to 800, with
a number for every 100 pixels.  If instead we wanted the ruler to
range from 7 to 16, we would code

<tscreen><verb>
gtk_ruler_set_range( GTK_RULER(vruler), 7, 16, 0, 20);
</verb></tscreen>

The indicator on the ruler is a small triangular mark that indicates
the position of the pointer relative to the ruler.  If the ruler is
used to follow the mouse pointer, the motion_notify_event signal
should be connected to the motion_notify_event method of the ruler.
To follow all mouse movements within a window area, we would use

<tscreen><verb>
#define EVENT_METHOD(i, x) GTK_WIDGET_CLASS(GTK_OBJECT(i)->klass)->x

gtk_signal_connect_object( GTK_OBJECT(area), "motion_notify_event",
         (GtkSignalFunc)EVENT_METHOD(ruler, motion_notify_event),
         GTK_OBJECT(ruler) );
</verb></tscreen>

The following example creates a drawing area with a horizontal ruler
above it and a vertical ruler to the left of it.  The size of the
drawing area is 600 pixels wide by 400 pixels high.  The horizontal
ruler spans from 7 to 13 with a mark every 100 pixels, while the
vertical ruler spans from 0 to 400 with a mark every 100 pixels.
Placement of the drawing area and the rulers are done using a table.

<tscreen><verb>
/* rulers.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>

#define EVENT_METHOD(i, x) GTK_WIDGET_CLASS(GTK_OBJECT(i)->klass)->x

#define XSIZE  600
#define YSIZE  400

/* this routine gets control when the close button is clicked
 */
void close_application( GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data ) {
    gtk_main_quit();
}


/* the main routine
 */
int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) {
    GtkWidget *window, *table, *area, *hrule, *vrule;

    /* initialize gtk and create the main window */
    gtk_init( &amp;argc, &amp;argv );

    window = gtk_window_new( GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL );
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
            GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC( close_application ), NULL);
    gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);

    /* create a table for placing the ruler and the drawing area */
    table = gtk_table_new( 3, 2, FALSE );
    gtk_container_add( GTK_CONTAINER(window), table );

    area = gtk_drawing_area_new();
    gtk_drawing_area_size( (GtkDrawingArea *)area, XSIZE, YSIZE );
    gtk_table_attach( GTK_TABLE(table), area, 1, 2, 1, 2,
                      GTK_EXPAND|GTK_FILL, GTK_FILL, 0, 0 );
    gtk_widget_set_events( area, GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK );

    /* The horizontal ruler goes on top.  As the mouse moves across the drawing area,
       a motion_notify_event is passed to the appropriate event handler for the ruler. */
    hrule = gtk_hruler_new();
    gtk_ruler_set_metric( GTK_RULER(hrule), GTK_PIXELS );
    gtk_ruler_set_range( GTK_RULER(hrule), 7, 13, 0, 20 );
    gtk_signal_connect_object( GTK_OBJECT(area), "motion_notify_event",
                               (GtkSignalFunc)EVENT_METHOD(hrule, motion_notify_event),
                               GTK_OBJECT(hrule) );
    /*  GTK_WIDGET_CLASS(GTK_OBJECT(hrule)->klass)->motion_notify_event, */
    gtk_table_attach( GTK_TABLE(table), hrule, 1, 2, 0, 1,
                      GTK_EXPAND|GTK_SHRINK|GTK_FILL, GTK_FILL, 0, 0 );
    
    /* The vertical ruler goes on the left.  As the mouse moves across the drawing area,
       a motion_notify_event is passed to the appropriate event handler for the ruler. */
    vrule = gtk_vruler_new();
    gtk_ruler_set_metric( GTK_RULER(vrule), GTK_PIXELS );
    gtk_ruler_set_range( GTK_RULER(vrule), 0, YSIZE, 10, YSIZE );
    gtk_signal_connect_object( GTK_OBJECT(area), "motion_notify_event",
                               (GtkSignalFunc)
                                  GTK_WIDGET_CLASS(GTK_OBJECT(vrule)->klass)->motion_notify_event,
                               GTK_OBJECT(vrule) );
    gtk_table_attach( GTK_TABLE(table), vrule, 0, 1, 1, 2,
                      GTK_FILL, GTK_EXPAND|GTK_SHRINK|GTK_FILL, 0, 0 );

    /* now show everything */
    gtk_widget_show( area );
    gtk_widget_show( hrule );
    gtk_widget_show( vrule );
    gtk_widget_show( table );
    gtk_widget_show( window );
    gtk_main();

    return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Statusbars
<p>
Statusbars are simple widgets used to display a text message. They keep a stack 
of the messages pushed onto them, so that popping the current message 
will re-display the previous text message.

In order to allow different parts of an application to use the same statusbar to display
messages, the statusbar widget issues Context Identifiers which are used to identify
different 'users'. The message on top of the stack is the one displayed, no matter what context
it is in. Messages are stacked in last-in-first-out order, not context identifier order.

A statusbar is created with a call to:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_statusbar_new (void);
</verb></tscreen>

A new Context Identifier is requested using a call to the following function with a short
textual description of the context:
<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_statusbar_get_context_id (GtkStatusbar *statusbar,
                                    const gchar  *context_description);
</verb></tscreen>

There are three functions that can operate on statusbars.
<tscreen><verb>
guint       gtk_statusbar_push           (GtkStatusbar *statusbar,
                                         guint          context_id,
                                         gchar         *text);

void       gtk_statusbar_pop            (GtkStatusbar *statusbar)
                                         guint         context_id);
void       gtk_statusbar_remove         (GtkStatusbar *statusbar,
                                         guint         context_id,
                                         guint         message_id); 
</verb></tscreen>

The first, gtk_statusbar_push, is used to add a new message to the statusbar. 
It returns a Message Identifier, which can be passed later to the function gtk_statusbar_remove
to remove the message with the given Message and Context Identifiers from the statusbar's stack.

The function gtk_statusbar_pop removes the message highest in the stack with the given
Context Identifier.

The following example creates a statusbar and two buttons, one for pushing items
onto the statusbar, and one for popping the last item back off.

<tscreen><verb>
/* statusbar.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>
#include <glib.h>

GtkWidget *status_bar;

void push_item (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data)
{
  static int count = 1;
  char buff[20];

  g_snprintf(buff, 20, "Item %d", count++);
  gtk_statusbar_push( GTK_STATUSBAR(status_bar), (guint) &amp;data, buff);

  return;
}

void pop_item (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data)
{
  gtk_statusbar_pop( GTK_STATUSBAR(status_bar), (guint) &amp;data );
  return;
}

int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{

    GtkWidget *window;
    GtkWidget *vbox;
    GtkWidget *button;

    int context_id;

    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);

    /* create a new window */
    window = gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
    gtk_widget_set_usize( GTK_WIDGET (window), 200, 100);
    gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW (window), "GTK Statusbar Example");
    gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
                       (GtkSignalFunc) gtk_exit, NULL);
 
    vbox = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 1);
    gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(window), vbox);
    gtk_widget_show(vbox);
          
    status_bar = gtk_statusbar_new();      
    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (vbox), status_bar, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
    gtk_widget_show (status_bar);

    context_id = gtk_statusbar_get_context_id( GTK_STATUSBAR(status_bar), "Statusbar example");

    button = gtk_button_new_with_label("push item");
    gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(button), "clicked",
        GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (push_item), &amp;context_id);
    gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), button, TRUE, TRUE, 2);
    gtk_widget_show(button);              

    button = gtk_button_new_with_label("pop last item");
    gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(button), "clicked",
        GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (pop_item), &amp;context_id);
    gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), button, TRUE, TRUE, 2);
    gtk_widget_show(button);              

    /* always display the window as the last step so it all splashes on
     * the screen at once. */
    gtk_widget_show(window);

    gtk_main ();

    return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Text Entries
<p>
The Entry widget allows text to be typed and displayed in a single line text box. 
The text may be set with functions calls that allow new text to replace, 
prepend or append the current contents of the Entry widget.

There are two functions for creating Entry widgets:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_entry_new (void);

GtkWidget* gtk_entry_new_with_max_length (guint16 max);
</verb></tscreen>

The first just creates a new Entry widget, whilst the second creates a new Entry and 
sets a limit on the length of the text within the Entry..

There are several functions for altering the text which is currently within the Entry widget.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_entry_set_text       (GtkEntry    *entry,
                               const gchar *text);
void gtk_entry_append_text    (GtkEntry    *entry,
                               const gchar *text);
void gtk_entry_prepend_text   (GtkEntry    *entry,
                               const gchar *text);
</verb></tscreen>

The function gtk_entry_set_text sets the contents of the Entry widget, replacing the
current contents. The functions gtk_entry_append_text and gtk_entry_prepend_text allow
the current contents to be appended and prepended to.

The next function allows the current insertion point to be set.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_entry_set_position   (GtkEntry *entry,
                               gint     position);
</verb></tscreen>

The contents of the Entry can be retrieved by using a call to the following function. This
is useful in the callback functions described below.
<tscreen><verb>
gchar* gtk_entry_get_text (GtkEntry *entry);
</verb></tscreen>

If we don't want the contents of the Entry to be changed by someone typing into it, we
can change it's edittable state.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_entry_set_editable (GtkEntry *entry,
                             gboolean editable);
</verb></tscreen>

This function allows us to toggle the edittable state of the Entry widget by passing in
TRUE or FALSE values for the editable argument.

If we are using the Entry where we don't want the text entered to be visible, for
example when a password is being entered, we can use the following function, which
also takes a boolean flag.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_entry_set_visibility (GtkEntry *entry,
                               gboolean visible);
</verb></tscreen>

A region of the text may be set as selected by using the following function. This would
most often be used after setting some default text in an Entry, making it easy for the user
to remove it.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_entry_select_region (GtkEntry *entry,
                              gint     start,
                              gint     end);
</verb></tscreen>

If we want to catch when the user has entered text, we can connect to the
<tt/activate/ or <tt/changed/ signal. Activate is raised when the user hits 
the enter key within the Entry widget. Changed is raised when the text changes at all, 
e.g. for every character entered or removed.

The following code is an example of using an Entry widget.
<tscreen><verb>
/* entry.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>

void enter_callback(GtkWidget *widget, GtkWidget *entry)
{
  gchar *entry_text;
  entry_text = gtk_entry_get_text(GTK_ENTRY(entry));
  printf("Entry contents: %s\n", entry_text);
}

void entry_toggle_editable (GtkWidget *checkbutton,
				   GtkWidget *entry)
{
  gtk_entry_set_editable(GTK_ENTRY(entry),
			 GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(checkbutton)->active);
}

void entry_toggle_visibility (GtkWidget *checkbutton,
				   GtkWidget *entry)
{
  gtk_entry_set_visibility(GTK_ENTRY(entry),
			 GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(checkbutton)->active);
}

int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{

    GtkWidget *window;
    GtkWidget *vbox, *hbox;
    GtkWidget *entry;
    GtkWidget *button;
    GtkWidget *check;

    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);

    /* create a new window */
    window = gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
    gtk_widget_set_usize( GTK_WIDGET (window), 200, 100);
    gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW (window), "GTK Entry");
    gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
                       (GtkSignalFunc) gtk_exit, NULL);

    vbox = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 0);
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), vbox);
    gtk_widget_show (vbox);

    entry = gtk_entry_new_with_max_length (50);
    gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(entry), "activate",
		       GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(enter_callback),
		       entry);
    gtk_entry_set_text (GTK_ENTRY (entry), "hello");
    gtk_entry_append_text (GTK_ENTRY (entry), " world");
    gtk_entry_select_region (GTK_ENTRY (entry),
			     0, GTK_ENTRY(entry)->text_length);
    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (vbox), entry, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
    gtk_widget_show (entry);

    hbox = gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 0);
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (vbox), hbox);
    gtk_widget_show (hbox);
                                  
    check = gtk_check_button_new_with_label("Editable");
    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (hbox), check, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(check), "toggled",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(entry_toggle_editable), entry);
    gtk_toggle_button_set_state(GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(check), TRUE);
    gtk_widget_show (check);
    
    check = gtk_check_button_new_with_label("Visible");
    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (hbox), check, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(check), "toggled",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(entry_toggle_visibility), entry);
    gtk_toggle_button_set_state(GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(check), TRUE);
    gtk_widget_show (check);
                                   
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Close");
    gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			       GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(gtk_exit),
			       GTK_OBJECT (window));
    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (vbox), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
    GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS (button, GTK_CAN_DEFAULT);
    gtk_widget_grab_default (button);
    gtk_widget_show (button);
    
    gtk_widget_show(window);

    gtk_main();
    return(0);
}
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Color Selection
<P>
The color selection widget is, not surprisingly, a widget for interactive
selection of colors. This composite widget lets the user select a color by manipulating
RGB (Red, Green, Blue) and HSV (Hue, Saturation, Value) triples. This is done
either by adjusting single values with sliders or entries, or by picking the desired
color from a hue-saturation wheel/value bar. Optionally, the opacity of the color can also
be set.

The color selection widget currently emits only one signal, "color_changed", which is emitted
whenever the current color in the widget changes, either when the user changes it or if
it's set explicitly through gtk_color_selection_set_color().

Lets have a look at what the color selection widget has to offer us. The widget comes
in two flavours; gtk_color_selection and gtk_color_selection_dialog:

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_color_selection_new(void);
</verb></tscreen>
	
You'll probably not be using this constructor directly. It creates an orphan
GtkColorSelection widget which you'll have to parent yourself. The GtkColorSelection widget
inherits from the GtkVBox widget.

<tscreen><verb> 
GtkWidget *gtk_color_selection_dialog_new(const gchar *title);
</verb></tscreen>

This is the most common color selection constructor. It creates a GtkColorSelectionDialog, which
inherits from a GtkDialog. It consists of a GtkFrame containing a GtkColorSelection widget, a
GtkHSeparator and a GtkHBox with three buttons, "Ok", "Cancel" and "Help". You can reach these
buttons by accessing the "ok_button", "cancel_button" and "help_button" widgets in the
GtkColorSelectionDialog structure, (i.e. GTK_COLOR_SELECTION_DIALOG(colorseldialog)->ok_button).

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_color_selection_set_update_policy(GtkColorSelection *colorsel, 
                                           GtkUpdateType policy);
</verb></tscreen>

This function sets the update policy. The default policy is GTK_UPDATE_CONTINOUS which means that
the current color is updated continously when the user drags the sliders or presses the mouse and drags
in the hue-saturation wheel or value bar. If you experience performance problems, you may
want to set the policy to GTK_UPDATE_DISCONTINOUS or GTK_UPDATE_DELAYED.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_color_selection_set_opacity(GtkColorSelection *colorsel,
                                     gint use_opacity);
</verb></tscreen>

The color selection widget supports adjusting the opacity of a color (also known as the alpha channel).
This is disabled by default. Calling this function with use_opacity set to TRUE enables opacity.
Likewise, use_opacity set to FALSE will disable opacity.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_color_selection_set_color(GtkColorSelection *colorsel,
                                   gdouble *color);
</verb></tscreen>

You can set the current color explicitly by calling this function with a pointer to an array
of colors (gdouble). The length of the array depends on whether opacity is enabled or not.
Position 0 contains the red component, 1 is green, 2 is blue and opacity is at position 3 (only if
opacity is enabled, see gtk_color_selection_set_opacity()). All values are between 0.0 and 1.0.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_color_selection_get_color(GtkColorSelection *colorsel,
                                   gdouble *color);
</verb></tscreen>

When you need to query the current color, typically when you've received a "color_changed" signal,
you use this function. Color is a pointer to the array of colors to fill in. See the
gtk_color_selection_set_color() function for the description of this array.

<!-- Need to do a whole section on DnD - TRG
Drag and drop
-------------

The color sample areas (right under the hue-saturation wheel) supports drag and drop. The type of
drag and drop is "application/x-color". The message data consists of an array of 4
(or 5 if opacity is enabled) gdouble values, where the value at position 0 is 0.0 (opacity
on) or 1.0 (opacity off) followed by the red, green and blue values at positions 1,2 and 3 respectively.
If opacity is enabled, the opacity is passed in the value at position 4.
-->

Here's a simple example demonstrating the use of the GtkColorSelectionDialog. The program displays a window
containing a drawing area. Clicking on it opens a color selection dialog, and changing the color in the
color selection dialog changes the background color.

<tscreen><verb>
#include <glib.h>
#include <gdk/gdk.h>
#include <gtk/gtk.h>

GtkWidget *colorseldlg = NULL;
GtkWidget *drawingarea = NULL;

/* Color changed handler */

void color_changed_cb (GtkWidget *widget, GtkColorSelection *colorsel)
{
  gdouble color[3];
  GdkColor gdk_color;
  GdkColormap *colormap;

  /* Get drawingarea colormap */

  colormap = gdk_window_get_colormap (drawingarea->window);

  /* Get current color */

  gtk_color_selection_get_color (colorsel,color);

  /* Fit to a unsigned 16 bit integer (0..65535) and insert into the GdkColor structure */

  gdk_color.red = (guint16)(color[0]*65535.0);
  gdk_color.green = (guint16)(color[1]*65535.0);
  gdk_color.blue = (guint16)(color[2]*65535.0);

  /* Allocate color */

  gdk_color_alloc (colormap, &amp;gdk_color);

  /* Set window background color */

  gdk_window_set_background (drawingarea->window, &amp;gdk_color);

  /* Clear window */

  gdk_window_clear (drawingarea->window);
}

/* Drawingarea event handler */

gint area_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event, gpointer client_data)
{
  gint handled = FALSE;
  GtkWidget *colorsel;

  /* Check if we've received a button pressed event */

  if (event->type == GDK_BUTTON_PRESS &amp;&amp; colorseldlg == NULL)
    {
      /* Yes, we have an event and there's no colorseldlg yet! */

      handled = TRUE;

      /* Create color selection dialog */

      colorseldlg = gtk_color_selection_dialog_new("Select background color");

      /* Get the GtkColorSelection widget */

      colorsel = GTK_COLOR_SELECTION_DIALOG(colorseldlg)->colorsel;

      /* Connect to the "color_changed" signal, set the client-data to the colorsel widget */

      gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(colorsel), "color_changed",
        (GtkSignalFunc)color_changed_cb, (gpointer)colorsel);

      /* Show the dialog */

      gtk_widget_show(colorseldlg);
    }

  return handled;
}

/* Close down and exit handler */

void destroy_window (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer client_data)
{
  gtk_main_quit ();
}

/* Main */

gint main (gint argc, gchar *argv[])
{
  GtkWidget *window;

  /* Initialize the toolkit, remove gtk-related commandline stuff */

  gtk_init (&amp;argc,&amp;argv);

  /* Create toplevel window, set title and policies */

  window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
  gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW(window), "Color selection test");
  gtk_window_set_policy (GTK_WINDOW(window), TRUE, TRUE, TRUE);

  /* Attach to the "delete" and "destroy" events so we can exit */

  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(window), "delete_event",
    (GtkSignalFunc)destroy_window, (gpointer)window);

  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(window), "destroy",
    (GtkSignalFunc)destroy_window, (gpointer)window);
  
  /* Create drawingarea, set size and catch button events */

  drawingarea = gtk_drawing_area_new ();

  gtk_drawing_area_size (GTK_DRAWING_AREA(drawingarea), 200, 200);

  gtk_widget_set_events (drawingarea, GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK);

  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(drawingarea), "event", 
    (GtkSignalFunc)area_event, (gpointer)drawingarea);
  
  /* Add drawingarea to window, then show them both */

  gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(window), drawingarea);

  gtk_widget_show (drawingarea);
  gtk_widget_show (window);
  
  /* Enter the gtk main loop (this never returns) */

  gtk_main ();

  /* Satisfy grumpy compilers */

  return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> File Selections
<p>
The file selection widget is a quick and simple way to display a File 
dialog box.  It comes complete with Ok, Cancel, and Help buttons, a great way
to cut down on programming time.

To create a new file selection box use:

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_file_selection_new (gchar *title);
</verb></tscreen>

To set the filename, for example to bring up a specific directory, or
give a default filename, use this function: 

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_file_selection_set_filename (GtkFileSelection *filesel, gchar *filename);
</verb></tscreen>

To grab the text that the user has entered or clicked on, use this 
function:

<tscreen><verb>
gchar* gtk_file_selection_get_filename (GtkFileSelection *filesel);
</verb></tscreen>

There are also pointers to the widgets contained within the file 
selection widget. These are:

<itemize>
<item>dir_list
<item>file_list
<item>selection_entry
<item>selection_text
<item>main_vbox
<item>ok_button
<item>cancel_button
<item>help_button
</itemize>

Most likely you will want to use the ok_button, cancel_button, and
help_button pointers in signaling their use.

Included here is an example stolen from testgtk.c, modified to run
on it's own.  As you will see, there is nothing much to creating a file 
selection widget.  While, in this example, the Help button appears on the 
screen, it does nothing as there is not a signal attached to it. 

<tscreen><verb>
/* filesel.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>

/* Get the selected filename and print it to the console */
void file_ok_sel (GtkWidget *w, GtkFileSelection *fs)
{
    g_print ("%s\n", gtk_file_selection_get_filename (GTK_FILE_SELECTION (fs)));
}

void destroy (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data)
{
    gtk_main_quit ();
}

int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
    GtkWidget *filew;
    
    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
    
    /* Create a new file selection widget */
    filew = gtk_file_selection_new ("File selection");
    
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (filew), "destroy",
			(GtkSignalFunc) destroy, &amp;filew);
    /* Connect the ok_button to file_ok_sel function */
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (GTK_FILE_SELECTION (filew)->ok_button),
			"clicked", (GtkSignalFunc) file_ok_sel, filew );
    
    /* Connect the cancel_button to destroy the widget */
    gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (GTK_FILE_SELECTION (filew)->cancel_button),
			       "clicked", (GtkSignalFunc) gtk_widget_destroy,
			       GTK_OBJECT (filew));
    
    /* Lets set the filename, as if this were a save dialog, and we are giving
     a default filename */
    gtk_file_selection_set_filename (GTK_FILE_SELECTION(filew), 
				     "penguin.png");
    
    gtk_widget_show(filew);
    gtk_main ();
    return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> Container Widgets
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Notebooks
<p>
The NoteBook Widget is a collection of 'pages' that overlap each other,
each page contains different information.  This widget has become more common 
lately in GUI programming, and it is a good way to show blocks similar 
information that warrant separation in their display.

The first function call you will need to know, as you can probably 
guess by now, is used to create a new notebook widget.

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_notebook_new (void);
</verb></tscreen>

Once the notebook has been created, there are 12 functions that 
operate on the notebook widget.  Let's look at them individually.

The first one we will look at is how to position the page indicators.
These page indicators or 'tabs' as they are referred to, can be positioned
in four ways; top, bottom, left, or right.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_notebook_set_tab_pos (GtkNotebook *notebook, GtkPositionType pos);
</verb></tscreen>

GtkPostionType will be one of the following, and they are pretty self explanatory.
<itemize>
<item> GTK_POS_LEFT
<item> GTK_POS_RIGHT
<item> GTK_POS_TOP
<item> GTK_POS_BOTTOM
</itemize>

GTK_POS_TOP is the default.

Next we will look at how to add pages to the notebook.  There are three
ways to add pages to the NoteBook.  Let's look at the first two together as 
they are quite similar.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_notebook_append_page (GtkNotebook *notebook, GtkWidget *child, GtkWidget *tab_label);

void gtk_notebook_prepend_page (GtkNotebook *notebook, GtkWidget *child, GtkWidget *tab_label);
</verb></tscreen>

These functions add pages to the notebook by inserting them from the 
back of the notebook (append), or the front of the notebook (prepend).  
*child is the widget that is placed within the notebook page, and *tab_label is
the label for the page being added.

The final function for adding a page to the notebook contains all of 
the properties of the previous two, but it allows you to specify what position
you want the page to be in the notebook.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_notebook_insert_page (GtkNotebook *notebook, GtkWidget *child, GtkWidget *tab_label, gint position);
</verb></tscreen>

The parameters are the same as _append_ and _prepend_ except it 
contains an extra parameter, position.  This parameter is used to specify what
place this page will inserted to.

Now that we know how to add a page, lets see how we can remove a page 
from the notebook.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_notebook_remove_page (GtkNotebook *notebook, gint page_num);
</verb></tscreen>

This function takes the page specified by page_num and removes it from 
the widget *notebook.

To find out what the current page is in a notebook use the function:

<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_notebook_current_page (GtkNotebook *notebook);
</verb></tscreen>

These next two functions are simple calls to move the notebook page 
forward or backward.  Simply provide the respective function call with the
notebook widget you wish to operate on.  Note:  When the NoteBook is currently
on the last page, and gtk_notebook_next_page is called, the notebook will 
wrap back to the first page.  Likewise, if the NoteBook is on the first page, 
and gtk_notebook_prev_page is called, the notebook will wrap to the last page.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_notebook_next_page (GtkNoteBook *notebook);
void gtk_notebook_prev_page (GtkNoteBook *notebook);
</verb></tscreen>

This next function sets the 'active' page.  If you wish the
notebook to be opened to page 5 for example, you would use this function.  
Without using this function, the notebook defaults to the first page.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_notebook_set_page (GtkNotebook *notebook, gint page_num);
</verb></tscreen>

The next two functions add or remove the notebook page tabs and the 
notebook border respectively.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs (GtkNotebook *notebook, gint show_tabs);
void gtk_notebook_set_show_border (GtkNotebook *notebook, gint show_border);
</verb></tscreen>

show_tabs and show_border can both be either TRUE or FALSE (0 or 1).

Now lets look at an example, it is expanded from the testgtk.c code 
that comes with the GTK distribution, and it shows all 13 functions. This 
small program, creates a window with a notebook and six buttons.  The notebook 
contains 11 pages, added in three different ways, appended, inserted, and 
prepended.  The buttons allow you rotate the tab positions, add/remove the tabs
and border, remove a page, change pages in both a forward and backward manner,
and exit the program. 

<tscreen><verb>
/* notebook.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>

/* This function rotates the position of the tabs */
void rotate_book (GtkButton *button, GtkNotebook *notebook)
{
    gtk_notebook_set_tab_pos (notebook, (notebook->tab_pos +1) %4);
}

/* Add/Remove the page tabs and the borders */
void tabsborder_book (GtkButton *button, GtkNotebook *notebook)
{
    gint tval = FALSE;
    gint bval = FALSE;
    if (notebook->show_tabs == 0)
	    tval = TRUE; 
    if (notebook->show_border == 0)
	    bval = TRUE;
    
    gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs (notebook, tval);
    gtk_notebook_set_show_border (notebook, bval);
}

/* Remove a page from the notebook */
void remove_book (GtkButton *button, GtkNotebook *notebook)
{
    gint page;
    
    page = gtk_notebook_current_page(notebook);
    gtk_notebook_remove_page (notebook, page);
    /* Need to refresh the widget -- 
     This forces the widget to redraw itself. */
    gtk_widget_draw(GTK_WIDGET(notebook), NULL);
}

void delete (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data)
{
    gtk_main_quit ();
}

int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
    GtkWidget *window;
    GtkWidget *button;
    GtkWidget *table;
    GtkWidget *notebook;
    GtkWidget *frame;
    GtkWidget *label;
    GtkWidget *checkbutton;
    int i;
    char bufferf[32];
    char bufferl[32];
    
    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
    
    window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
    
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (delete), NULL);
    
    gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
    
    table = gtk_table_new(2,6,TRUE);
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), table);
    
    /* Create a new notebook, place the position of the tabs */
    notebook = gtk_notebook_new ();
    gtk_notebook_set_tab_pos (GTK_NOTEBOOK (notebook), GTK_POS_TOP);
    gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), notebook, 0,6,0,1);
    gtk_widget_show(notebook);
    
    /* lets append a bunch of pages to the notebook */
    for (i=0; i < 5; i++) {
	sprintf(bufferf, "Append Frame %d", i+1);
	sprintf(bufferl, "Page %d", i+1);
	
	frame = gtk_frame_new (bufferf);
	gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (frame), 10);
	gtk_widget_set_usize (frame, 100, 75);
	gtk_widget_show (frame);
	
	label = gtk_label_new (bufferf);
	gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (frame), label);
	gtk_widget_show (label);
	
	label = gtk_label_new (bufferl);
	gtk_notebook_append_page (GTK_NOTEBOOK (notebook), frame, label);
    }
    
    
    /* now lets add a page to a specific spot */
    checkbutton = gtk_check_button_new_with_label ("Check me please!");
    gtk_widget_set_usize(checkbutton, 100, 75);
    gtk_widget_show (checkbutton);
    
    label = gtk_label_new ("Add spot");
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (checkbutton), label);
    gtk_widget_show (label);
    label = gtk_label_new ("Add page");
    gtk_notebook_insert_page (GTK_NOTEBOOK (notebook), checkbutton, label, 2);
    
    /* Now finally lets prepend pages to the notebook */
    for (i=0; i < 5; i++) {
	sprintf(bufferf, "Prepend Frame %d", i+1);
	sprintf(bufferl, "PPage %d", i+1);
	
	frame = gtk_frame_new (bufferf);
	gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (frame), 10);
	gtk_widget_set_usize (frame, 100, 75);
	gtk_widget_show (frame);
	
	label = gtk_label_new (bufferf);
	gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (frame), label);
	gtk_widget_show (label);
	
	label = gtk_label_new (bufferl);
	gtk_notebook_prepend_page (GTK_NOTEBOOK(notebook), frame, label);
    }
    
    /* Set what page to start at (page 4) */
    gtk_notebook_set_page (GTK_NOTEBOOK(notebook), 3);
    
    
    /* create a bunch of buttons */
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("close");
    gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			       GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (delete), NULL);
    gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), button, 0,1,1,2);
    gtk_widget_show(button);
    
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("next page");
    gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			       (GtkSignalFunc) gtk_notebook_next_page,
			       GTK_OBJECT (notebook));
    gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), button, 1,2,1,2);
    gtk_widget_show(button);
    
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("prev page");
    gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			       (GtkSignalFunc) gtk_notebook_prev_page,
			       GTK_OBJECT (notebook));
    gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), button, 2,3,1,2);
    gtk_widget_show(button);
    
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("tab position");
    gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			       (GtkSignalFunc) rotate_book, GTK_OBJECT(notebook));
    gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), button, 3,4,1,2);
    gtk_widget_show(button);
    
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("tabs/border on/off");
    gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			       (GtkSignalFunc) tabsborder_book,
			       GTK_OBJECT (notebook));
    gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), button, 4,5,1,2);
    gtk_widget_show(button);
    
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("remove page");
    gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			       (GtkSignalFunc) remove_book,
			       GTK_OBJECT(notebook));
    gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), button, 5,6,1,2);
    gtk_widget_show(button);
    
    gtk_widget_show(table);
    gtk_widget_show(window);
    
    gtk_main ();
    
    return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Hopefully this helps you on your way with creating notebooks for your
GTK applications.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Scrolled Windows
<p>
Scrolled windows are used to create a scrollable area inside a real window.  
You may insert any types of widgets to these scrolled windows, and they will
all be accessable regardless of the size by using the scrollbars.

The following function is used to create a new scolled window.

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_scrolled_window_new (GtkAdjustment *hadjustment,
                                    GtkAdjustment *vadjustment);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Where the first argument is the adjustment for the horizontal
direction, and the second, the adjustment for the vertical direction.
These are almost always set to NULL.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy (GtkScrolledWindow *scrolled_window,
                                     GtkPolicyType      hscrollbar_policy,
				     GtkPolicyType      vscrollbar_policy);
</verb></tscreen>

This sets the policy to be used with respect to the scrollbars.
The first arguement is the scrolled window you wish to change. The second
sets the policiy for the horizontal scrollbar, and the third, 
the vertical scrollbar.  

The policy may be one of GTK_POLICY AUTOMATIC, or GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS.
GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC will automatically decide whether you need
scrollbars, wheras GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS will always leave the scrollbars
there.

Here is a simple example that packs 100 toggle buttons into a scrolled window.
I've only commented on the parts that may be new to you.

<tscreen><verb>
/* scrolledwin.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>

void destroy(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer *data)
{
    gtk_main_quit();
}

int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
    static GtkWidget *window;
    GtkWidget *scrolled_window;
    GtkWidget *table;
    GtkWidget *button;
    char buffer[32];
    int i, j;
    
    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
    
    /* Create a new dialog window for the scrolled window to be
     * packed into.  A dialog is just like a normal window except it has a 
     * vbox and a horizontal seperator packed into it.  It's just a shortcut
     * for creating dialogs */
    window = gtk_dialog_new ();
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
			(GtkSignalFunc) destroy, NULL);
    gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "dialog");
    gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 0);
    gtk_widget_set_usize(window, 300, 300);
    
    /* create a new scrolled window. */
    scrolled_window = gtk_scrolled_window_new (NULL, NULL);
    
    gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (scrolled_window), 10);
    
    /* the policy is one of GTK_POLICY AUTOMATIC, or GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS.
     * GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC will automatically decide whether you need
     * scrollbars, wheras GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS will always leave the scrollbars
     * there.  The first one is the horizontal scrollbar, the second, 
     * the vertical. */
    gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy (GTK_SCROLLED_WINDOW (scrolled_window),
                                    GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC, GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS);
    /* The dialog window is created with a vbox packed into it. */								
    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (GTK_DIALOG(window)->vbox), scrolled_window, 
			TRUE, TRUE, 0);
    gtk_widget_show (scrolled_window);
    
    /* create a table of 10 by 10 squares. */
    table = gtk_table_new (10, 10, FALSE);
    
    /* set the spacing to 10 on x and 10 on y */
    gtk_table_set_row_spacings (GTK_TABLE (table), 10);
    gtk_table_set_col_spacings (GTK_TABLE (table), 10);
    
    /* pack the table into the scrolled window */
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (scrolled_window), table);
    gtk_widget_show (table);
    
    /* this simply creates a grid of toggle buttons on the table
     * to demonstrate the scrolled window. */
    for (i = 0; i < 10; i++)
       for (j = 0; j < 10; j++) {
          sprintf (buffer, "button (%d,%d)\n", i, j);
	  button = gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label (buffer);
	  gtk_table_attach_defaults (GTK_TABLE (table), button,
	                             i, i+1, j, j+1);
          gtk_widget_show (button);
       }
    
    /* Add a "close" button to the bottom of the dialog */
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("close");
    gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
			       (GtkSignalFunc) gtk_widget_destroy,
			       GTK_OBJECT (window));
    
    /* this makes it so the button is the default. */
    
    GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS (button, GTK_CAN_DEFAULT);
    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (GTK_DIALOG (window)->action_area), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
    
    /* This grabs this button to be the default button. Simply hitting
     * the "Enter" key will cause this button to activate. */
    gtk_widget_grab_default (button);
    gtk_widget_show (button);
    
    gtk_widget_show (window);
    
    gtk_main();
    
    return(0);
}
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Try playing with resizing the window.  You'll notice how the scrollbars
react.  You may also wish to use the gtk_widget_set_usize() call to set the default
size of the window or other widgets.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->   
<sect1> Paned Window Widgets
<p>
The paned window widgets are useful when you want to divide an area
into two parts, with the relative size of the two parts controlled by
the user. A groove is drawn between the two portions with a handle
that the user can drag to change the ratio. The division can either
be horizontal (HPaned) or vertical (VPaned).
   
To create a new paned window, call one of:
   
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_hpaned_new (void)
GtkWidget* gtk_vpaned_new (void)
</verb></tscreen>

After creating the paned window widget, you need to add child widgets
to its two halves. To do this, use the functions:
   
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_paned_add1 (GtkPaned *paned, GtkWidget *child)
void gtk_paned_add2 (GtkPaned *paned, GtkWidget *child)
</verb></tscreen>
   
<tt/gtk_paned_add1()/ adds the child widget to the left or top half of
the paned window. <tt/gtk_paned_add2()/ adds the child widget to the
right or bottom half of the paned window.
   
As an example, we will create part of the user interface of an
imaginary email program. A window is divided into two portions
vertically, with the top portion being a list of email messages and
the bottom portion the text of the email message. Most of the program
is pretty straightforward. A couple of points to note are: Text can't
be added to a Text widget until it is realized. This could be done by
calling <tt/gtk_widget_realize()/, but as a demonstration of an alternate
technique, we connect a handler to the "realize" signal to add the
text. Also, we need to add the <tt/GTK_SHRINK/ option to some of the
items in the table containing the text window and its scrollbars, so
that when the bottom portion is made smaller, the correct portions
shrink instead of being pushed off the bottom of the window.

<tscreen><verb>
/* paned.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>
   
/* Create the list of "messages" */
GtkWidget *
create_list (void)
{

    GtkWidget *scrolled_window;
    GtkWidget *list;
    GtkWidget *list_item;
   
    int i;
    char buffer[16];
   
    /* Create a new scrolled window, with scrollbars only if needed */
    scrolled_window = gtk_scrolled_window_new (NULL, NULL);
    gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy (GTK_SCROLLED_WINDOW (scrolled_window),
				    GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC, 
				    GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC);
   
    /* Create a new list and put it in the scrolled window */
    list = gtk_list_new ();
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(scrolled_window), list);
    gtk_widget_show (list);
   
    /* Add some messages to the window */
    for (i=0; i<10; i++) {

    	sprintf(buffer,"Message #%d",i);
    	list_item = gtk_list_item_new_with_label (buffer);
    	gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(list), list_item);
    	gtk_widget_show (list_item);

    }
   
    return scrolled_window;
}
   
/* Add some text to our text widget - this is a callback that is invoked
when our window is realized. We could also force our window to be
realized with gtk_widget_realize, but it would have to be part of
a hierarchy first */

void
realize_text (GtkWidget *text, gpointer data)
{
    gtk_text_freeze (GTK_TEXT (text));
    gtk_text_insert (GTK_TEXT (text), NULL, &amp;text->style->black, NULL,
    "From: pathfinder@nasa.gov\n"
    "To: mom@nasa.gov\n"
    "Subject: Made it!\n"
    "\n"
    "We just got in this morning. The weather has been\n"
    "great - clear but cold, and there are lots of fun sights.\n"
    "Sojourner says hi. See you soon.\n"
    " -Path\n", -1);
   
    gtk_text_thaw (GTK_TEXT (text));
}
   
/* Create a scrolled text area that displays a "message" */
GtkWidget *
create_text (void)
{
    GtkWidget *table;
    GtkWidget *text;
    GtkWidget *hscrollbar;
    GtkWidget *vscrollbar;
   
    /* Create a table to hold the text widget and scrollbars */
    table = gtk_table_new (2, 2, FALSE);
   
    /* Put a text widget in the upper left hand corner. Note the use of
     * GTK_SHRINK in the y direction */
    text = gtk_text_new (NULL, NULL);
    gtk_table_attach (GTK_TABLE (table), text, 0, 1, 0, 1,
		      GTK_FILL | GTK_EXPAND,
		      GTK_FILL | GTK_EXPAND | GTK_SHRINK, 0, 0);
    gtk_widget_show (text);
   
    /* Put a HScrollbar in the lower left hand corner */
    hscrollbar = gtk_hscrollbar_new (GTK_TEXT (text)->hadj);
    gtk_table_attach (GTK_TABLE (table), hscrollbar, 0, 1, 1, 2,
		      GTK_EXPAND | GTK_FILL, GTK_FILL, 0, 0);
    gtk_widget_show (hscrollbar);
   
    /* And a VScrollbar in the upper right */
    vscrollbar = gtk_vscrollbar_new (GTK_TEXT (text)->vadj);
    gtk_table_attach (GTK_TABLE (table), vscrollbar, 1, 2, 0, 1,
		      GTK_FILL, GTK_EXPAND | GTK_FILL | GTK_SHRINK, 0, 0);
    gtk_widget_show (vscrollbar);
   
    /* Add a handler to put a message in the text widget when it is realized */
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (text), "realize",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (realize_text), NULL);
   
    return table;
}
   
int
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
    GtkWidget *window;
    GtkWidget *vpaned;
    GtkWidget *list;
    GtkWidget *text;

    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
   
    window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
    gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Paned Windows");
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_main_quit), NULL);
    gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
   
    /* create a vpaned widget and add it to our toplevel window */
   
    vpaned = gtk_vpaned_new ();
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(window), vpaned);
    gtk_widget_show (vpaned);
   
    /* Now create the contents of the two halves of the window */
   
    list = create_list ();
    gtk_paned_add1 (GTK_PANED(vpaned), list);
    gtk_widget_show (list);
   
    text = create_text ();
    gtk_paned_add2 (GTK_PANED(vpaned), text);
    gtk_widget_show (text);
    gtk_widget_show (window);
    gtk_main ();
    return 0;
}

</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->   
<sect1> Aspect Frames
<p>
The aspect frame widget is like a frame widget, except that it also
enforces the aspect ratio (that is, the ratio of the width to the
height) of the child widget to have a certain value, adding extra
space if necessary. This is useful, for instance, if you want to
preview a larger image. The size of the preview should vary when
the user resizes the window, but the aspect ratio needs to always match
the original image.
   
To create a new aspect frame, use:
   
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_aspect_frame_new	 (const gchar *label,
   					gfloat xalign,
   					gfloat yalign,
   					gfloat ratio,
   					gint obey_child)
</verb></tscreen>
   
<tt/xalign/ and <tt/yalign/ specifiy alignment as with Alignment
widgets. If <tt/obey_child/ is true, the aspect ratio of a child
widget will match the aspect ratio of the ideal size it requests.
Otherwise, it is given by <tt/ratio/.
   
To change the options of an existing aspect frame, you can use:
   
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_aspect_frame_set (GtkAspectFrame *aspect_frame,
			   gfloat xalign,
			   gfloat yalign,
			   gfloat ratio,
			   gint obey_child)
</verb></tscreen>
   
<p>
As an example, the following program uses an AspectFrame to
present a drawing area whose aspect ratio will always be 2:1, no
matter how the user resizes the top-level window.
   
<tscreen><verb>
/* aspectframe.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>
   
int
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
    GtkWidget *window;
    GtkWidget *aspect_frame;
    GtkWidget *drawing_area;
    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
   
    window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
    gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Aspect Frame");
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
    GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_main_quit), NULL);
    gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
   
    /* Create an aspect_frame and add it to our toplevel window */
   
    aspect_frame = gtk_aspect_frame_new ("2x1", /* label */
                                         0.5, /* center x */
                                         0.5, /* center y */
                                         2, /* xsize/ysize = 2 */
                                         FALSE /* ignore child's aspect */);
   
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(window), aspect_frame);
    gtk_widget_show (aspect_frame);
   
    /* Now add a child widget to the aspect frame */
   
    drawing_area = gtk_drawing_area_new ();
   
    /* Ask for a 200x200 window, but the AspectFrame will give us a 200x100
     * window since we are forcing a 2x1 aspect ratio */
    gtk_widget_set_usize (drawing_area, 200, 200);
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(aspect_frame), drawing_area);
    gtk_widget_show (drawing_area);
   
    gtk_widget_show (window);
    gtk_main ();
    return 0;
}  
</verb></tscreen>
                              
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> List Widgets
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<p>
The GtkList widget is designed to act as a vertical container for widgets
that should be of the type GtkListItem.

A GtkList widget has its own window to receive events and it's own
background color which is usualy white.  As it is directly derived from a
GtkContainer it can be treated as such by using the GTK_CONTAINER(List)
macro, see the GtkContainer widget for more on this.
One should already be familar whith the usage of a GList and its
related functions g_list_*() to be able to use the GtkList widget to
its fully extends.

There is one field inside the structure definition of the GtkList widget
that will be of greater interest to us, this is:

<tscreen><verb>
struct _GtkList
{
  ...
  GList *selection;
  guint selection_mode;
  ...
}; 
</verb></tscreen>

The selection field of a GtkList points to a linked list of all items
that are cureently selected, or `NULL' if the selection is empty.
So to learn about the current selection we read the GTK_LIST()->selection
field, but do not modify it since the internal fields are maintained by
the gtk_list_*() functions.

The selection_mode of the GtkList determines the selection facilities
of a GtkList and therefore the contents of the GTK_LIST()->selection
field:

The selection_mode may be one of the following:
<itemize>
<item> GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE -   The selection is either `NULL'
                        or contains a GList* pointer
                        for a single selected item.

<item> GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE -  The selection is `NULL' if the list
                        contains no widgets or insensitive
                        ones only, otherwise it contains
                        a GList pointer for one GList
                        structure, and therefore exactly
                        one list item.

<item> GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE -  The selection is `NULL' if no list
                        items are selected or a GList pointer
                        for the first selected item. That
                        in turn points to a GList structure
                        for the second selected item and so
                        on.

<item> GTK_SELECTION_EXTENDED - The selection is always `NULL'.
</itemize>
<p>
The default is GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Signals
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
void selection_changed (GtkList *LIST)
</verb></tscreen>

This signal will be invoked whenever a the selection field
of a GtkList has changed. This happens when a child of
the GtkList got selected or unselected.

<tscreen><verb>
void select_child (GtkList *LIST, GtkWidget *CHILD)
</verb></tscreen>

This signal is invoked when a child of the GtkList is about
to get selected. This happens mainly on calls to
gtk_list_select_item(), gtk_list_select_child(), button presses
and sometimes indirectly triggered on some else occasions where
children get added to or removed from the GtkList.

<tscreen><verb>
void unselect_child (GtkList *LIST, GtkWidget *CHILD)
</verb></tscreen>

This signal is invoked when a child of the GtkList is about
to get unselected. This happens mainly on calls to
gtk_list_unselect_item(), gtk_list_unselect_child(), button presses
and sometimes indirectly triggered on some else occasions where
children get added to or removed from the GtkList.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Functions
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_list_get_type (void)
</verb></tscreen>

Returns the `GtkList' type identifier.

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_list_new (void)
</verb></tscreen>

Create a new `GtkList' object. The new widget is
returned as a pointer to a `GtkWidget' object.
`NULL' is returned on failure.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_insert_items (GtkList *LIST, GList *ITEMS, gint POSITION)
</verb></tscreen>

Insert list items into the LIST, starting at POSITION.
ITEMS is a doubly linked list where each nodes data
pointer is expected to point to a newly created GtkListItem.
The GList nodes of ITEMS are taken over by the LIST.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_append_items (GtkList *LIST, GList *ITEMS)
</verb></tscreen>

Insert list items just like gtk_list_insert_items() at the end
of the LIST. The GList nodes of ITEMS are taken over by the LIST.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_prepend_items (GtkList *LIST, GList *ITEMS)
</verb></tscreen>

Insert list items just like gtk_list_insert_items() at the very
beginning of the LIST. The GList nodes of ITEMS are taken over
by the LIST.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_remove_items (GtkList *LIST, GList *ITEMS)
</verb></tscreen>

Remove list items from the LIST. ITEMS is a doubly linked
list where each nodes data pointer is expected to point to a
direct child of LIST. It is the callers responsibility to make a
call to g_list_free(ITEMS) afterwards. Also the caller has to
destroy the list items himself.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_clear_items (GtkList *LIST, gint START, gint END)
</verb></tscreen>

Remove and destroy list items from the LIST. a widget is affected if
its current position within LIST is in the range specified by START
and END.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_select_item (GtkList *LIST, gint ITEM)
</verb></tscreen>

Invoke the select_child signal for a list item
specified through its current position within LIST.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_unselect_item (GtkList *LIST, gint ITEM)
</verb></tscreen>

Invoke the unselect_child signal for a list item
specified through its current position within LIST.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_select_child (GtkList *LIST, GtkWidget *CHILD)
</verb></tscreen>

Invoke the select_child signal for the specified CHILD.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_unselect_child (GtkList *LIST, GtkWidget *CHILD)
</verb></tscreen>

Invoke the unselect_child signal for the specified CHILD.

<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_list_child_position (GtkList *LIST, GtkWidget *CHILD)
</verb></tscreen>

Return the position of CHILD within LIST. `-1' is returned on failure.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_set_selection_mode (GtkList *LIST, GtkSelectionMode MODE)
</verb></tscreen>

Set LIST to the selection mode MODE wich can be of GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE,
GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE, GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE or GTK_SELECTION_EXTENDED.

<tscreen><verb>
GtkList* GTK_LIST (gpointer OBJ)
</verb></tscreen>

Cast a generic pointer to `GtkList*'. *Note Standard Macros::, for
more info.

<tscreen><verb>
GtkListClass* GTK_LIST_CLASS (gpointer CLASS)
</verb></tscreen>

Cast a generic pointer to `GtkListClass*'. *Note Standard Macros::,
for more info.

<tscreen><verb>
gint GTK_IS_LIST (gpointer OBJ)
</verb></tscreen>

Determine if a generic pointer refers to a `GtkList' object. *Note
Standard Macros::, for more info.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Example
<p>
Following is an example program that will print out the changes
of the selection of a GtkList, and lets you "arrest" list items
into a prison by selecting them with the rightmost mouse button:

<tscreen><verb>
/* list.c */

/* include the gtk+ header files
 * include stdio.h, we need that for the printf() function
 */
#include        <gtk/gtk.h>
#include        <stdio.h>

/* this is our data identification string to store
 * data in list items
 */
const   gchar   *list_item_data_key="list_item_data";


/* prototypes for signal handler that we are going to connect
 * to the GtkList widget
 */
static  void    sigh_print_selection    (GtkWidget      *gtklist,
                                         gpointer       func_data);
static  void    sigh_button_event       (GtkWidget      *gtklist,
                                         GdkEventButton *event,
                                         GtkWidget      *frame);


/* main function to set up the user interface */

gint main (int argc, gchar *argv[])
{                                  
    GtkWidget       *separator;
    GtkWidget       *window;
    GtkWidget       *vbox;
    GtkWidget       *scrolled_window;
    GtkWidget       *frame;
    GtkWidget       *gtklist;
    GtkWidget       *button;
    GtkWidget       *list_item;
    GList           *dlist;
    guint           i;
    gchar           buffer[64];
    
    
    /* initialize gtk+ (and subsequently gdk) */

    gtk_init(&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
    
    
    /* create a window to put all the widgets in
     * connect gtk_main_quit() to the "destroy" event of
     * the window to handle window manager close-window-events
     */
    window=gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
    gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW(window), "GtkList Example");
    gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(window),
		       "destroy",
		       GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(gtk_main_quit),
		       NULL);
    
    
    /* inside the window we need a box to arrange the widgets
     * vertically */
    vbox=gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 5);
    gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(vbox), 5);
    gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(window), vbox);
    gtk_widget_show(vbox);
    
    /* this is the scolled window to put the GtkList widget inside */
    scrolled_window=gtk_scrolled_window_new(NULL, NULL);
    gtk_widget_set_usize(scrolled_window, 250, 150);
    gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(vbox), scrolled_window);
    gtk_widget_show(scrolled_window);
    
    /* create the GtkList widget
     * connect the sigh_print_selection() signal handler
     * function to the "selection_changed" signal of the GtkList
     * to print out the selected items each time the selection
     * has changed */
    gtklist=gtk_list_new();
    gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(scrolled_window), gtklist);
    gtk_widget_show(gtklist);
    gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gtklist),
		       "selection_changed",
		       GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(sigh_print_selection),
		       NULL);
    
    /* we create a "Prison" to put a list item in ;)
     */
    frame=gtk_frame_new("Prison");
    gtk_widget_set_usize(frame, 200, 50);
    gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(frame), 5);
    gtk_frame_set_shadow_type(GTK_FRAME(frame), GTK_SHADOW_OUT);
    gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(vbox), frame);
    gtk_widget_show(frame);
    
    /* connect the sigh_button_event() signal handler to the GtkList
     * wich will handle the "arresting" of list items
     */
    gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gtklist),
		       "button_release_event",
		       GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(sigh_button_event),
		       frame);
    
    /* create a separator
     */
    separator=gtk_hseparator_new();
    gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(vbox), separator);
    gtk_widget_show(separator);
    
    /* finaly create a button and connect it´s "clicked" signal
     * to the destroyment of the window
     */
    button=gtk_button_new_with_label("Close");
    gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(vbox), button);
    gtk_widget_show(button);
    gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(button),
			      "clicked",
			      GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(gtk_widget_destroy),
			      GTK_OBJECT(window));
    
    
    /* now we create 5 list items, each having it´s own
     * label and add them to the GtkList using gtk_container_add()
     * also we query the text string from the label and
     * associate it with the list_item_data_key for each list item
     */
    for (i=0; i<5; i++) {
	GtkWidget       *label;
	gchar           *string;
	
	sprintf(buffer, "ListItemContainer with Label #%d", i);
	label=gtk_label_new(buffer);
	list_item=gtk_list_item_new();
	gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(list_item), label);
	gtk_widget_show(label);
	gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gtklist), list_item);
	gtk_widget_show(list_item);
	gtk_label_get(GTK_LABEL(label), &amp;string);
	gtk_object_set_data(GTK_OBJECT(list_item),
			    list_item_data_key,
			    string);
    }
    /* here, we are creating another 5 labels, this time
     * we use gtk_list_item_new_with_label() for the creation
     * we can´t query the text string from the label because
     * we don´t have the labels pointer and therefore
     * we just associate the list_item_data_key of each
     * list item with the same text string
     * for adding of the list items we put them all into a doubly
     * linked list (GList), and then add them by a single call to
     * gtk_list_append_items()
     * because we use g_list_prepend() to put the items into the
     * doubly linked list, their order will be descending (instead
     * of ascending when using g_list_append())
     */
    dlist=NULL;
    for (; i<10; i++) {
	sprintf(buffer, "List Item with Label %d", i);
	list_item=gtk_list_item_new_with_label(buffer);
	dlist=g_list_prepend(dlist, list_item);
	gtk_widget_show(list_item);
	gtk_object_set_data(GTK_OBJECT(list_item),
			    list_item_data_key,
			    "ListItem with integrated Label");
    }
    gtk_list_append_items(GTK_LIST(gtklist), dlist);
    
    /* finaly we want to see the window, don´t we? ;)
     */
    gtk_widget_show(window);
    
    /* fire up the main event loop of gtk
     */
    gtk_main();
    
    /* we get here after gtk_main_quit() has been called which
     * happens if the main window gets destroyed
     */
    return 0;
}

/* this is the signal handler that got connected to button
 * press/release events of the GtkList
 */
void
sigh_button_event       (GtkWidget      *gtklist,
                         GdkEventButton *event,
                         GtkWidget      *frame)
{
    /* we only do something if the third (rightmost mouse button
     * was released
     */
    if (event->type==GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE &amp;&amp;
	event->button==3) {
	GList           *dlist, *free_list;
	GtkWidget       *new_prisoner;
	
	/* fetch the currently selected list item which
	 * will be our next prisoner ;)
	 */
	dlist=GTK_LIST(gtklist)->selection;
	if (dlist)
		new_prisoner=GTK_WIDGET(dlist->data);
	else
		new_prisoner=NULL;
	
	/* look for already prisoned list items, we
	 * will put them back into the list
	 * remember to free the doubly linked list that
	 * gtk_container_children() returns
	 */
	dlist=gtk_container_children(GTK_CONTAINER(frame));
	free_list=dlist;
	while (dlist) {
	    GtkWidget       *list_item;
	    
	    list_item=dlist->data;
	    
	    gtk_widget_reparent(list_item, gtklist);
	    
	    dlist=dlist->next;
	}
	g_list_free(free_list);
	
	/* if we have a new prisoner, remove him from the
	 * GtkList and put him into the frame "Prison"
	 * we need to unselect the item before
	 */
	if (new_prisoner) {
	    GList   static_dlist;
	    
	    static_dlist.data=new_prisoner;
	    static_dlist.next=NULL;
	    static_dlist.prev=NULL;
	    
	    gtk_list_unselect_child(GTK_LIST(gtklist),
				    new_prisoner);
	    gtk_widget_reparent(new_prisoner, frame);
	}
    }
}

/* this is the signal handler that gets called if GtkList
 * emits the "selection_changed" signal
 */
void
sigh_print_selection    (GtkWidget      *gtklist,
                         gpointer       func_data)
{
    GList   *dlist;
    
    /* fetch the doubly linked list of selected items
     * of the GtkList, remember to treat this as read-only!
     */
    dlist=GTK_LIST(gtklist)->selection;
    
    /* if there are no selected items there is nothing more
     * to do than just telling the user so
     */
    if (!dlist) {
	g_print("Selection cleared\n");
	return;
    }
    /* ok, we got a selection and so we print it
     */
    g_print("The selection is a ");
    
    /* get the list item from the doubly linked list
     * and then query the data associated with list_item_data_key
     * we then just print it
     */
    while (dlist) {
	GtkObject       *list_item;
	gchar           *item_data_string;
	
	list_item=GTK_OBJECT(dlist->data);
	item_data_string=gtk_object_get_data(list_item,
					     list_item_data_key);
	g_print("%s ", item_data_string);
	
	dlist=dlist->next;
    }
    g_print("\n");
}
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> List Item Widget
<p>
The GtkListItem widget is designed to act as a container holding up
to one child, providing functions for selection/deselection just like
the GtkList widget requires them for its children.

A GtkListItem has its own window to receive events and has its own
background color which is usualy white.  

As it is directly derived from a
GtkItem it can be treated as such by using the GTK_ITEM(ListItem)
macro, see the GtkItem widget for more on this.
Usualy a GtkListItem just holds a label to identify e.g. a filename
within a GtkList -- therefore the convenient function
gtk_list_item_new_with_label() is provided.  The same effect can be
achieved by creating a GtkLabel on its own, setting its alignment
to xalign=0 and yalign=0.5 with a subsequent container addition
to the GtkListItem.

As one is not forced to add a GtkLabel to a GtkListItem, you could
also add a GtkVBox or a GtkArrow etc. to the GtkListItem.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Signals
<p>
A GtkListItem does not create new signals on its own, but inherits
the signals of a GtkItem. *Note GtkItem::, for more info.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Functions
<p>

<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_list_item_get_type (void)
</verb></tscreen>

Returns the `GtkListItem' type identifier.

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_list_item_new (void)
</verb></tscreen>

Create a new `GtkListItem' object. The new widget is
returned as a pointer to a `GtkWidget' object.
`NULL' is returned on failure.

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_list_item_new_with_label (gchar *LABEL)
</verb></tscreen>

Create a new `GtkListItem' object, having a single GtkLabel as
the sole child. The new widget is returned as a pointer to a
`GtkWidget' object.
`NULL' is returned on failure.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_item_select (GtkListItem *LIST_ITEM)
</verb></tscreen>

This function is basicaly a wrapper around a call to
gtk_item_select (GTK_ITEM (list_item)) which will emit the
select signal.
*Note GtkItem::, for more info.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_item_deselect (GtkListItem *LIST_ITEM)
</verb></tscreen>

This function is basicaly a wrapper around a call to
gtk_item_deselect (GTK_ITEM (list_item)) which will emit the
deselect signal.
*Note GtkItem::, for more info.

<tscreen><verb>
GtkListItem* GTK_LIST_ITEM (gpointer OBJ)
</verb></tscreen>

Cast a generic pointer to `GtkListItem*'. *Note Standard Macros::,
for more info.

<tscreen><verb>
GtkListItemClass* GTK_LIST_ITEM_CLASS (gpointer CLASS)
</verb></tscreen>

Cast a generic pointer to `GtkListItemClass*'. *Note Standard
Macros::, for more info.

<tscreen><verb>
gint GTK_IS_LIST_ITEM (gpointer OBJ)
</verb></tscreen>

Determine if a generic pointer refers to a `GtkListItem' object.
*Note Standard Macros::, for more info.
 
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Example
<p>
Please see the GtkList example on this, which covers the usage of a
GtkListItem as well.

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Menu Widgets
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<p>
There are two ways to create menus, there's the easy way, and there's the
hard way.  Both have their uses, but you can usually use the menufactory
(the easy way).  The "hard" way is to create all the menus using the calls
directly.  The easy way is to use the gtk_menu_factory calls.  This is
much simpler, but there are advantages and disadvantages to each approach.

The menufactory is much easier to use, and to add new menus to, although
writing a few wrapper functions to create menus using the manual method 
could go a long way towards usability.  With the menufactory, it is not 
possible to add images or the character '/' to the menus.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Manual Menu Creation
<p>
In the true tradition of teaching, we'll show you the hard
way first. <tt>:)</>
<p>
There are three widgets that go into making a menubar and submenus:
<itemize>
<item>a menu item, which is what the user wants to select, e.g. 'Save'
<item>a menu, which acts as a container for the menu items, and
<item>a menubar, which is a container for each of the individual menus,
</itemize>

This is slightly complicated by the fact that menu item widgets are used for two different things. They are
both the widets that are packed into the menu, and the widget that is packed into the menubar, which,
when selected, activiates the menu.

Let's look at the functions that are used to create menus and menubars.
This first function is used to create a new menubar.

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_menu_bar_new(void);
</verb></tscreen>

This rather self explanatory function creates a new menubar.  You use
gtk_container_add to pack this into a window, or the box_pack functions to
pack it into a box - the same as buttons.

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_menu_new();
</verb></tscreen>

This function returns a pointer to a new menu, it is never actually shown
(with gtk_widget_show), it is just a container for the menu items.  Hopefully this will
become more clear when you look at the example below.
<p>
The next two calls are used to create menu items that are packed into
the menu (and menubar).

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_menu_item_new();
</verb></tscreen>

and

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_menu_item_new_with_label(const char *label);
</verb></tscreen>

These calls are used to create the menu items that are to be displayed.
Remember to differentiate between a "menu" as created with gtk_menu_new
and a "menu item" as created by the gtk_menu_item_new functions.  The
menu item will be an actual button with an associated action,
whereas a menu will be a container holding menu items.

The gtk_menu_new_with_label and gtk_menu_new functions are just as you'd expect after
reading about the buttons.  One creates a new menu item with a label
already packed into it, and the other just creates a blank menu item.

Once you've created a menu item you have to put it into a menu. This is done using the function
gtk_menu_append. In order to capture when the item is selected by the user, we need to connect
to the <tt/activate/ signal in the usual way.
So, if we wanted to create a standard <tt/File/ menu, with the options <tt/Open/, 
<tt/Save/ and <tt/Quit/ the code would look something like

<tscreen><verb>
file_menu = gtk_menu_new();    /* Don't need to show menus */

/* Create the menu items */
open_item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label("Open");
save_item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label("Save");
quit_item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label("Quit");

/* Add them to the menu */
gtk_menu_append( GTK_MENU(file_menu), open_item);
gtk_menu_append( GTK_MENU(file_menu), save_item);
gtk_menu_append( GTK_MENU(file_menu), quit_item);

/* Attach the callback functions to the activate signal */
gtk_signal_connect_object( GTK_OBJECT(open_items), "activate",
		           GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(menuitem_response), (gpointer) "file.open");
gtk_signal_connect_object( GTK_OBJECT(save_items), "activate",
		           GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(menuitem_response), (gpointer) "file.save");

/* We can attach the Quit menu item to our exit function */
gtk_signal_connect_object( GTK_OBJECT(quit_items), "activate",
		           GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(destroy), (gpointer) "file.quit");

/* We do need to show menu items */
gtk_widget_show( open_item );
gtk_widget_show( save_item );
gtk_widget_show( quit_item );
</verb></tscreen>

At this point we have our menu. Now we need to create a menubar and a menu item for the <tt/File/ entry,
to which we add our menu. The code looks like this 

<tscreen><verb>
menu_bar = gtk_menu_bar_new();
gtk_container_add( GTK_CONTAINER(window), menu_bar);
gtk_widget_show( menu_bar );

file_item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label("File");
gtk_widget_show(file_item);
</verb></tscreen>

Now we need to associate the menu with <tt/file_item/. This is done with the function

<tscreen>
void gtk_menu_item_set_submenu( GtkMenuItem *menu_item,
                                GtkWidget *submenu);
</tscreen>

So, our example would continue with

<tscreen><verb>
gtk_menu_item_set_submenu( GTK_MENU_ITEM(file_item), file_menu);
</verb></tscreen>

All that is left to do is to add the menu to the menubar, which is accomplished using the function

<tscreen>
void gtk_menu_bar_append( GtkMenuBar *menu_bar, GtkWidget *menu_item);
</tscreen>

which in our case looks like this:

<tscreen><verb>
gtk_menu_bar_append( menu_bar, file_item );
</verb></tscreen>

If we wanted the menu right justified on the menubar, such as help menus often are, we can
use the following function (again on <tt/file_item/ in the current example) before attaching 
it to the menubar.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_menu_item_right_justify (GtkMenuItem *menu_item);
</verb></tscreen>

Here is a summary of the steps needed to create a menu bar with menus attached:
<itemize>
<item>	Create a new menu using gtk_menu_new()
<item>	Use multiple calls to gtk_menu_item_new() for each item you wish to have on
  your menu.  And use gtk_menu_append() to put each of these new items on
  to the menu.
<item>	Create a menu item using gtk_menu_item_new().  This will be the root of
  the menu, the text appearing here will be on the menubar itself.
<item>	Use gtk_menu_item_set_submenu() to attach the menu to
  the root menu item (The one created in the above step).
<item>	Create a new menubar using gtk_menu_bar_new.  This step only needs
  to be done once when creating a series of menus on one menu bar.
<item> Use gtk_menu_bar_append to put the root menu onto the menubar.
</itemize>
<p>
Creating a popup menu is nearly the same.  The difference is that the
menu is not posted `automatically' by a menubar, but explicitly
by calling the function gtk_menu_popup() from a button-press event, for example.
Take these steps:
<itemize>
<item>Create an event handling function.  It needs to have the prototype
<tscreen>
static gint handler(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event);
</tscreen>
and it will use the event to find out where to pop up the menu.
<item>In the event handler, if event is a mouse button press, treat
<tt>event</tt> as a button event (which it is) and use it as
shown in the sample code to pass information to gtk_menu_popup().
<item>Bind that event handler to a widget with
<tscreen>
gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(widget), "event",
                          GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (handler), GTK_OBJECT(menu));
</tscreen>
where <tt>widget</tt> is the widget you are binding to, <tt>handler</tt>
is the handling function, and <tt>menu</tt> is a menu created with
gtk_menu_new().  This can be a menu which is also posted by a menu bar,
as shown in the sample code.
</itemize>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Manual Menu Example
<p>
That should about do it.  Let's take a look at an example to help clarify.

<tscreen><verb>
/* menu.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>

static gint button_press (GtkWidget *, GdkEvent *);
static void menuitem_response (gchar *);

int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{

    GtkWidget *window;
    GtkWidget *menu;
    GtkWidget *menu_bar;
    GtkWidget *root_menu;
    GtkWidget *menu_items;
    GtkWidget *vbox;
    GtkWidget *button;
    char buf[128];
    int i;

    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);

    /* create a new window */
    window = gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
    gtk_widget_set_usize( GTK_WIDGET (window), 200, 100);
    gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW (window), "GTK Menu Test");
    gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
                       (GtkSignalFunc) gtk_main_quit, NULL);

    /* Init the menu-widget, and remember -- never
     * gtk_show_widget() the menu widget!! 
     * This is the menu that holds the menu items, the one that
     * will pop up when you click on the "Root Menu" in the app */
    menu = gtk_menu_new();

    /* Next we make a little loop that makes three menu-entries for "test-menu".
     * Notice the call to gtk_menu_append.  Here we are adding a list of
     * menu items to our menu.  Normally, we'd also catch the "clicked"
     * signal on each of the menu items and setup a callback for it,
     * but it's omitted here to save space. */

    for(i = 0; i < 3; i++)
        {
            /* Copy the names to the buf. */
            sprintf(buf, "Test-undermenu - %d", i);

            /* Create a new menu-item with a name... */
            menu_items = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label(buf);

            /* ...and add it to the menu. */
            gtk_menu_append(GTK_MENU (menu), menu_items);

	    /* Do something interesting when the menuitem is selected */
	    gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(menu_items), "activate",
		GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(menuitem_response), (gpointer) g_strdup(buf));

            /* Show the widget */
            gtk_widget_show(menu_items);
        }

    /* This is the root menu, and will be the label
     * displayed on the menu bar.  There won't be a signal handler attached,
     * as it only pops up the rest of the menu when pressed. */
    root_menu = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label("Root Menu");

    gtk_widget_show(root_menu);

    /* Now we specify that we want our newly created "menu" to be the menu
     * for the "root menu" */
    gtk_menu_item_set_submenu(GTK_MENU_ITEM (root_menu), menu);

    /* A vbox to put a menu and a button in: */
    vbox = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0);
    gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(window), vbox);
    gtk_widget_show(vbox);

    /* Create a menu-bar to hold the menus and add it to our main window */
    menu_bar = gtk_menu_bar_new();
    gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), menu_bar, FALSE, FALSE, 2);
    gtk_widget_show(menu_bar);

    /* Create a button to which to attach menu as a popup */
    button = gtk_button_new_with_label("press me");
    gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(button), "event",
	GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (button_press), GTK_OBJECT(menu));
    gtk_box_pack_end(GTK_BOX(vbox), button, TRUE, TRUE, 2);
    gtk_widget_show(button);

    /* And finally we append the menu-item to the menu-bar -- this is the
     * "root" menu-item I have been raving about =) */
    gtk_menu_bar_append(GTK_MENU_BAR (menu_bar), root_menu);

    /* always display the window as the last step so it all splashes on
     * the screen at once. */
    gtk_widget_show(window);

    gtk_main ();

    return 0;
}



/* Respond to a button-press by posting a menu passed in as widget.
 *
 * Note that the "widget" argument is the menu being posted, NOT
 * the button that was pressed.
 */

static gint button_press (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event)
{

    if (event->type == GDK_BUTTON_PRESS) {
        GdkEventButton *bevent = (GdkEventButton *) event; 
        gtk_menu_popup (GTK_MENU(widget), NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL,
                        bevent->button, bevent->time);
        /* Tell calling code that we have handled this event; the buck
         * stops here. */
        return TRUE;
    }

    /* Tell calling code that we have not handled this event; pass it on. */
    return FALSE;
}


/* Print a string when a menu item is selected */

static void menuitem_response (gchar *string)
{
    printf("%s\n", string);
}
</verb></tscreen>

You may also set a menu item to be insensitive and, using an accelerator
table, bind keys to menu functions.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Using GtkMenuFactory
<p>
Now that we've shown you the hard way, here's how you do it using the
gtk_menu_factory calls.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Menu Factory Example
<p>
Here is an example using the GTK menu factory.  This is the first file,
menufactory.h.  We keep a separate menufactory.c and mfmain.c because of the global variables used
in the menufactory.c file.  

<tscreen><verb>
/* menufactory.h */

#ifndef __MENUFACTORY_H__
#define __MENUFACTORY_H__

#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif /* __cplusplus */

void get_main_menu (GtkWidget **menubar, GtkAcceleratorTable **table);
void menus_create(GtkMenuEntry *entries, int nmenu_entries);

#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif /* __cplusplus */

#endif /* __MENUFACTORY_H__ */
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
And here is the menufactory.c file.

<tscreen><verb>
/* menufactory.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>
#include <strings.h>

#include "mfmain.h"


static void menus_remove_accel(GtkWidget * widget, gchar * signal_name, gchar * path);
static gint menus_install_accel(GtkWidget * widget, gchar * signal_name, gchar key, gchar modifiers, gchar * path);
void menus_init(void);
void menus_create(GtkMenuEntry * entries, int nmenu_entries);


/* this is the GtkMenuEntry structure used to create new menus.  The
 * first member is the menu definition string.  The second, the
 * default accelerator key used to access this menu function with
 * the keyboard.  The third is the callback function to call when
 * this menu item is selected (by the accelerator key, or with the
 * mouse.) The last member is the data to pass to your callback function.
 */

static GtkMenuEntry menu_items[] =
{
	{"<Main>/File/New", "<control>N", NULL, NULL},
	{"<Main>/File/Open", "<control>O", NULL, NULL},
	{"<Main>/File/Save", "<control>S", NULL, NULL},
	{"<Main>/File/Save as", NULL, NULL, NULL},
	{"<Main>/File/<separator>", NULL, NULL, NULL},
	{"<Main>/File/Quit", "<control>Q", file_quit_cmd_callback, "OK, I'll quit"},
	{"<Main>/Options/Test", NULL, NULL, NULL}
};

/* calculate the number of menu_item's */
static int nmenu_items = sizeof(menu_items) / sizeof(menu_items[0]);

static int initialize = TRUE;
static GtkMenuFactory *factory = NULL;
static GtkMenuFactory *subfactory[1];
static GHashTable *entry_ht = NULL;

void get_main_menu(GtkWidget ** menubar, GtkAcceleratorTable ** table)
{
    if (initialize)
	    menus_init();
    
    if (menubar)
	    *menubar = subfactory[0]->widget;
    if (table)
	    *table = subfactory[0]->table;
}

void menus_init(void)
{
    if (initialize) {
	initialize = FALSE;
	
	factory = gtk_menu_factory_new(GTK_MENU_FACTORY_MENU_BAR);
	subfactory[0] = gtk_menu_factory_new(GTK_MENU_FACTORY_MENU_BAR);
	
	gtk_menu_factory_add_subfactory(factory, subfactory[0], "<Main>");
	menus_create(menu_items, nmenu_items);
    }
}

void menus_create(GtkMenuEntry * entries, int nmenu_entries)
{
    char *accelerator;
    int i;
    
    if (initialize)
	    menus_init();
    
    if (entry_ht)
	    for (i = 0; i < nmenu_entries; i++) {
		accelerator = g_hash_table_lookup(entry_ht, entries[i].path);
		if (accelerator) {
		    if (accelerator[0] == '\0')
			    entries[i].accelerator = NULL;
		    else
			    entries[i].accelerator = accelerator;
		}
	    }
    gtk_menu_factory_add_entries(factory, entries, nmenu_entries);
    
    for (i = 0; i < nmenu_entries; i++)
	    if (entries[i].widget) {
		gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(entries[i].widget), "install_accelerator",
				   (GtkSignalFunc) menus_install_accel,
				   entries[i].path);
		gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(entries[i].widget), "remove_accelerator",
				   (GtkSignalFunc) menus_remove_accel,
				   entries[i].path);
	    }
}

static gint menus_install_accel(GtkWidget * widget, gchar * signal_name, gchar key, gchar modifiers, gchar * path)
{
    char accel[64];
    char *t1, t2[2];
    
    accel[0] = '\0';
    if (modifiers & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
	    strcat(accel, "<control>");
    if (modifiers & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)
	    strcat(accel, "<shift>");
    if (modifiers & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
	    strcat(accel, "<alt>");
    
    t2[0] = key;
    t2[1] = '\0';
    strcat(accel, t2);
    
    if (entry_ht) {
	t1 = g_hash_table_lookup(entry_ht, path);
	g_free(t1);
    } else
	    entry_ht = g_hash_table_new(g_str_hash, g_str_equal);
    
    g_hash_table_insert(entry_ht, path, g_strdup(accel));
    
    return TRUE;
}

static void menus_remove_accel(GtkWidget * widget, gchar * signal_name, gchar * path)
{
    char *t;
    
    if (entry_ht) {
	t = g_hash_table_lookup(entry_ht, path);
	g_free(t);
	
	g_hash_table_insert(entry_ht, path, g_strdup(""));
    }
}

void menus_set_sensitive(char *path, int sensitive)
{
    GtkMenuPath *menu_path;
    
    if (initialize)
	    menus_init();
    
    menu_path = gtk_menu_factory_find(factory, path);
    if (menu_path)
	    gtk_widget_set_sensitive(menu_path->widget, sensitive);
    else
	    g_warning("Unable to set sensitivity for menu which doesn't exist: %s", path);
}

</verb></tscreen>
<p>
And here's the mfmain.h

<tscreen><verb>
/* mfmain.h */

#ifndef __MFMAIN_H__
#define __MFMAIN_H__


#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif /* __cplusplus */

void file_quit_cmd_callback(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data);

#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif /* __cplusplus */

#endif /* __MFMAIN_H__ */
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
And mfmain.c

<tscreen><verb>
/* mfmain.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>

#include "mfmain.h"
#include "menufactory.h"


int main(int argc, char *argv[])
{
    GtkWidget *window;
    GtkWidget *main_vbox;
    GtkWidget *menubar;
    
    GtkAcceleratorTable *accel;
    
    gtk_init(&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
    
    window = gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
    gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(window), "destroy", 
		       GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(file_quit_cmd_callback), 
		       "WM destroy");
    gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW(window), "Menu Factory");
    gtk_widget_set_usize(GTK_WIDGET(window), 300, 200);
    
    main_vbox = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 1);
    gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(main_vbox), 1);
    gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(window), main_vbox);
    gtk_widget_show(main_vbox);
    
    get_main_menu(&amp;menubar, &amp;accel);
    gtk_window_add_accelerator_table(GTK_WINDOW(window), accel);
    gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(main_vbox), menubar, FALSE, TRUE, 0);
    gtk_widget_show(menubar);
    
    gtk_widget_show(window);
    gtk_main();
    
    return(0);
}

/* This is just to demonstrate how callbacks work when using the
 * menufactory.  Often, people put all the callbacks from the menus
 * in a separate file, and then have them call the appropriate functions
 * from there.  Keeps it more organized. */
void file_quit_cmd_callback (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
    g_print ("%s\n", (char *) data);
    gtk_exit(0);
}
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
And a makefile so it'll be easier to compile it.

<tscreen><verb>
# Makefile.mf

CC      = gcc
PROF    = -g
C_FLAGS =  -Wall $(PROF) -L/usr/local/include -DDEBUG
L_FLAGS =  $(PROF) -L/usr/X11R6/lib -L/usr/local/lib 
L_POSTFLAGS = -lgtk -lgdk -lglib -lXext -lX11 -lm
PROGNAME = menufactory

O_FILES = menufactory.o mfmain.o

$(PROGNAME): $(O_FILES)
	rm -f $(PROGNAME)
	$(CC) $(L_FLAGS) -o $(PROGNAME) $(O_FILES) $(L_POSTFLAGS)

.c.o: 
	$(CC) -c $(C_FLAGS) $<

clean: 
	rm -f core *.o $(PROGNAME) nohup.out
distclean: clean 
	rm -f *~
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
For now, there's only this example.  An explanation and lots 'o' comments
will follow later.

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> Text Widget
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
The Text widget allows multiple lines of text to be displayed and edited. It supports both
multi-colored and multi-font text, allowing them to be mixed in any way we wish. It also has
a wide set of key based text editing commands, which are compatible with Emacs.

The text widget supports full cut-and-paste facilities, including the use of double- and
triple-click to select a word and a whole line, respectively.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Creating and Configuring a Text box
<p>
There is only one function for creating a new Text widget.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_text_new (GtkAdjustment *hadj,
                         GtkAdjustment *vadj);
</verb></tscreen>

The arguments allow us to give the Text widget pointers to Adjustments that can be used 
to track the viewing position of the widget. Passing NULL values to either or both of
these arguments will cause the gtk_text_new function to create it's own.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_text_set_adjustments (GtkText       *text,
                               GtkAdjustment *hadj,
                               GtkAdjustment *vadj);
</verb></tscreen>

The above function allows the horizontal and vertical adjustments of a Text widget to be
changed at any time.

The text widget will not automatically create it's own scrollbars when the amount of text
to be displayed is too long for the display window. We therefore have to create and add
them to the display layout ourselves.

<tscreen><verb>
  vscrollbar = gtk_vscrollbar_new (GTK_TEXT(text)->vadj);
  gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(hbox), vscrollbar, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
  gtk_widget_show (vscrollbar);
</verb></tscreen>

The above code snippet creates a new vertical scrollbar, and attaches it to the vertical
adjustment of the text widget, <tt/text/. It then packs it into a box in the normal way.

There are two main ways in which a Text widget can be used: to allow the user to edit a
body of text, or to allow us to display multiple lines of text to the user. In order for
us to switch between these modes of operation, the text widget has the following function:

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_text_set_editable    (GtkText *text,
                               gint    editable);
</verb></tscreen>

The <tt/editable/ argument is a TRUE or FALSE value that specifies whether the user is
permitted to edit the contents of the Text widget. When the text widget is editable, it
will display a cursor at the current insertion point.

You are not, however, restricted to just using the text widget in these two modes. You can
toggle the editable state of the text widget at any time, and can insert text at any time.

The text widget is capable of wrapping lines of text that are too long to fit onto a single
line of the display window. It's default behaviour is to break words across line breaks. This
can be changed using the next function:

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_text_set_word_wrap (GtkText *text,
                             gint    word_wrap);
</verb></tscreen>

Using this function allows us to specify that the text widget should wrap long lines on word
boundaries. The <tt/word_wrap/ argument is a TRUE or FALSE value.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Text Manipulation
<P>
The current insertion point of a Text widget can be set using
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_text_set_point (GtkText *text,
                         guint   index);
</verb></tscreen>
where <tt/index/ is the position to set the insertion point.

Analogous to this is the function for getting the current insertion point:
<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_text_get_point (GtkText *text);
</verb></tscreen>

A function that is useful in combination with the above two functions is
<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_text_get_length (GtkText *text);
</verb></tscreen>
which returns the current length of the Text widget. The length is the number of characters
that are within the text block of the widget, including characters such as carriage-return,
which marks the end of lines.

In order to insert text at the current insertion point of a Text widget, the function
gtk_text_insert is used, which also allows us to specify background and foreground colors and a 
font for the text.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_text_insert (GtkText    *text,
                      GdkFont    *font,
                      GdkColor   *fore,
                      GdkColor   *back,
                      const char *chars,
                      gint       length);
</verb></tscreen>

Passing a value of <tt/NULL/ in as the value for the foreground color, background colour or
font will result in the values set within the widget style to be used. Using a value of <tt/-1/ for
the length parameter will result in the whole of the text string given being inserted.

The text widget is one of the few within GTK that redraws itself dynamically, outside of the gtk_main
function. This means that all changes to the contents of the text widget take effect immediately. This
may be undesirable when performing multiple changes to the text widget. In order to allow us to perform
multiple updates to the text widget without it continuously redrawing, we can freeze the widget, which
temporarily stops it from automatically redrawing itself every time it is changed. We can then thaw the
widget after our updates are complete.

The following two functions perform this freeze and thaw action:

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_text_freeze (GtkText *text);
void gtk_text_thaw   (GtkText *text);         
</verb></tscreen>

Text is deleted from the text widget relative to the current insertion point by the following
two functions:

<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_text_backward_delete (GtkText *text,
                               guint   nchars);
gint gtk_text_forward_delete  (GtkText *text,
                               guint   nchars);
</verb></tscreen>

If you want to retrieve the contents of the text widget, then the macro 
<tt/GTK_TEXT_INDEX(t, index)/ allows you to retrieve the character at position
<tt/index/ within the text widget <tt/t/.

To retrieve larger blocks of text, we can use the function

<tscreen><verb>
gchar *gtk_editable_get_chars (GtkEditable *editable,
                               gint        start_pos,
                               gint        end_pos);   
</verb></tscreen>

This is a function of the parent class of the text widget. A value of -1 as
<tt/end_pos/ signifies the end of the text. The index of the text starts at 0.

The function allocates a new chunk of memory for the text block, so don't forget
to free it with a call to g_free when you have finished with it.
 
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Keyboard Shortcuts
<p>
The text widget has a number of pre-installed keyboard shotcuts for common
editing, motion and selection functions. These are accessed using Control and Alt
key combinations.

In addition to these, holding down the Control key whilst using cursor key movement
will move the cursor by words rather than characters. Holding down Shift whilst using
cursor movement will extend the selection.

<sect2>Motion Shotcuts
<p>
<itemize>
<item> Ctrl-A   Beginning of line
<item> Ctrl-E	End of line
<item> Ctrl-N   Next Line
<item> Ctrl-P	Previous Line
<item> Ctrl-B   Backward one character
<item> Ctrl-F   Forward one character
<item> Alt-B    Backward one word
<item> Alt-F	Forward one word
</itemize>

<sect2>Editing Shortcuts
<p>
<itemize>
<item> Ctrl-H   Delete Backward Character (Backspace)
<item> Ctrl-D   Delete Forward Character (Delete)
<item> Ctrl-W	Delete Backward Word
<item> Alt-D    Delete Forward Word
<item> Ctrl-K	Delete to end of line
<item> Ctrl-U	Delete line
</itemize>

<sect2>Selection Shortcuts
<p>
<itemize>
<item> Ctrl-X   Cut to clipboard
<item> Ctrl-C   Copy to clipboard
<item> Ctrl-V	Paste from clipboard
</itemize>

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> Undocumented Widgets
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<p>
These all require authors! :)  Please consider contributing to our tutorial.

If you must use one of these widgets that are undocumented, I strongly
suggest you take a look at their respective header files in the GTK distro.
GTK's function names are very descriptive.  Once you have an understanding
of how things work, it's not easy to figure out how to use a widget simply
by looking at it's function declarations.  This, along with a few examples
from others' code, and it should be no problem.

When you do come to understand all the functions of a new undocumented
widget, please consider writing a tutorial on it so others may benifit from
your time.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Range Controls

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Previews
<p>

(This may need to be rewritten to follow the style of the rest of the tutorial)

<tscreen><verb>

Previews serve a number of purposes in GIMP/GTK. The most important one is
this. High quality images may take up to tens of megabytes of memory - easy!
Any operation on an image that big is bound to take a long time. If it takes
you 5-10 trial-and-errors (i.e. 10-20 steps, since you have to revert after
you make an error) to choose the desired modification, it make take you
literally hours to make the right one - if you don't run out of memory
first. People who have spent hours in color darkrooms know the feeling.
Previews to the rescue!

But the annoyance of the delay is not the only issue. Oftentimes it is
helpful to compare the Before and After versions side-by-side or at least
back-to-back. If you're working with big images and 10 second delays,
obtaining the Before and After impressions is, to say the least, difficult.
For 30M images (4"x6", 600dpi, 24 bit) the side-by-side comparison is right
out for most people, while back-to-back is more like back-to-1001, 1002,
..., 1010-back! Previews to the rescue!

But there's more. Previews allow for side-by-side pre-previews. In other
words, you write a plug-in (e.g. the filterpack simulation) which would have
a number of here's-what-it-would-look-like-if-you-were-to-do-this previews.
An approach like this acts as a sort of a preview palette and is very
effective fow subtle changes. Let's go previews!

There's more. For certain plug-ins real-time image-specific human
intervention maybe necessary. In the SuperNova plug-in, for example, the
user is asked to enter the coordinates of the center of the future
supernova. The easiest way to do this, really, is to present the user with a
preview and ask him to intereactively select the spot. Let's go previews!

Finally, a couple of misc uses. One can use previews even when not working
with big images. For example, they are useful when rendering compicated
patterns. (Just check out the venerable Diffraction plug-in + many other
ones!) As another example, take a look at the colormap rotation plug-in
(work in progress). You can also use previews for little logo's inside you
plug-ins and even for an image of yourself, The Author. Let's go previews!

When Not to Use Previews

Don't use previews for graphs, drawing etc. GDK is much faster for that. Use
previews only for rendered images!

Let's go previews!

You can stick a preview into just about anything. In a vbox, an hbox, a
table, a button, etc. But they look their best in tight frames around them.
Previews by themselves do not have borders and look flat without them. (Of
course, if the flat look is what you want...) Tight frames provide the
necessary borders.

                               [Image][Image]

Previews in many ways are like any other widgets in GTK (whatever that
means) except they possess an addtional feature: they need to be filled with
some sort of an image! First, we will deal exclusively with the GTK aspect
of previews and then we'll discuss how to fill them.

GtkWidget *preview!

Without any ado:

                              /* Create a preview widget,
                              set its size, an show it */
GtkWidget *preview;
preview=gtk_preview_new(GTK_PREVIEW_COLOR)
                              /*Other option:
                              GTK_PREVIEW_GRAYSCALE);*/
gtk_preview_size (GTK_PREVIEW (preview), WIDTH, HEIGHT);
gtk_widget_show(preview);
my_preview_rendering_function(preview);

Oh yeah, like I said, previews look good inside frames, so how about:

GtkWidget *create_a_preview(int        Width,
                            int        Height,
                            int        Colorfulness)
{
  GtkWidget *preview;
  GtkWidget *frame;
  
  frame = gtk_frame_new(NULL);
  gtk_frame_set_shadow_type (GTK_FRAME (frame), GTK_SHADOW_IN);
  gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER(frame),0);
  gtk_widget_show(frame);

  preview=gtk_preview_new (Colorfulness?GTK_PREVIEW_COLOR
                                       :GTK_PREVIEW_GRAYSCALE);
  gtk_preview_size (GTK_PREVIEW (preview), Width, Height);
  gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(frame),preview);
  gtk_widget_show(preview);

  my_preview_rendering_function(preview);
  return frame;
}

That's my basic preview. This routine returns the "parent" frame so you can
place it somewhere else in your interface. Of course, you can pass the
parent frame to this routine as a parameter. In many situations, however,
the contents of the preview are changed continually by your application. In
this case you may want to pass a pointer to the preview to a
"create_a_preview()" and thus have control of it later.

One more important note that may one day save you a lot of time. Sometimes
it is desirable to label you preview. For example, you may label the preview
containing the original image as "Original" and the one containing the
modified image as "Less Original". It might occure to you to pack the
preview along with the appropriate label into a vbox. The unexpected caveat
is that if the label is wider than the preview (which may happen for a
variety of reasons unforseeable to you, from the dynamic decision on the
size of the preview to the size of the font) the frame expands and no longer
fits tightly over the preview. The same problem can probably arise in other
situations as well.

                                   [Image]

The solution is to place the preview and the label into a 2x1 table and by
attaching them with the following paramters (this is one possible variations
of course. The key is no GTK_FILL in the second attachment):

gtk_table_attach(GTK_TABLE(table),label,0,1,0,1,
                 0,
                 GTK_EXPAND|GTK_FILL,
                 0,0);
gtk_table_attach(GTK_TABLE(table),frame,0,1,1,2,
                 GTK_EXPAND,
                 GTK_EXPAND,
                 0,0);


And here's the result:

                                   [Image]

Misc

Making a preview clickable is achieved most easily by placing it in a
button. It also adds a nice border around the preview and you may not even
need to place it in a frame. See the Filter Pack Simulation plug-in for an
example.

This is pretty much it as far as GTK is concerned.

Filling In a Preview

In order to familiarize ourselves with the basics of filling in previews,
let's create the following pattern (contrived by trial and error):

                                   [Image]

void
my_preview_rendering_function(GtkWidget     *preview)
{
#define SIZE 100
#define HALF (SIZE/2)

  guchar *row=(guchar *) malloc(3*SIZE); /* 3 bits per dot */
  gint i, j;                             /* Coordinates    */
  double r, alpha, x, y;

  if (preview==NULL) return; /* I usually add this when I want */
                             /* to avoid silly crashes. You    */
                             /* should probably make sure that */
                             /* everything has been nicely     */
                             /* initialized!                   */
  for (j=0; j < ABS(cos(2*alpha)) ) { /* Are we inside the shape?  */
                                         /* glib.h contains ABS(x).   */
        row[i*3+0] = sqrt(1-r)*255;      /* Define Red                */
        row[i*3+1] = 128;                /* Define Green              */
        row[i*3+2] = 224;                /* Define Blue               */
      }                                  /* "+0" is for alignment!    */
      else {
        row[i*3+0] = r*255;
        row[i*3+1] = ABS(sin((float)i/SIZE*2*PI))*255;
        row[i*3+2] = ABS(sin((float)j/SIZE*2*PI))*255;
      }
    }
    gtk_preview_draw_row( GTK_PREVIEW(preview),row,0,j,SIZE);
    /* Insert "row" into "preview" starting at the point with  */
    /* coordinates (0,j) first column, j_th row extending SIZE */
    /* pixels to the right */
  }

  free(row); /* save some space */
  gtk_widget_draw(preview,NULL); /* what does this do? */
  gdk_flush(); /* or this? */
}

Non-GIMP users can have probably seen enough to do a lot of things already.
For the GIMP users I have a few pointers to add.

Image Preview

It is probably wize to keep a reduced version of the image around with just
enough pixels to fill the preview. This is done by selecting every n'th
pixel where n is the ratio of the size of the image to the size of the
preview. All further operations (including filling in the previews) are then
performed on the reduced number of pixels only. The following is my
implementation of reducing the image. (Keep in mind that I've had only basic
C!)

(UNTESTED CODE ALERT!!!)

typedef struct {
  gint      width;
  gint      height;
  gint      bbp;
  guchar    *rgb;
  guchar    *mask;
} ReducedImage;

enum {
  SELECTION_ONLY,
  SELCTION_IN_CONTEXT,
  ENTIRE_IMAGE
};

ReducedImage *Reduce_The_Image(GDrawable *drawable,
                               GDrawable *mask,
                               gint LongerSize,
                               gint Selection)
{
  /* This function reduced the image down to the the selected preview size */
  /* The preview size is determine by LongerSize, i.e. the greater of the  */
  /* two dimentions. Works for RGB images only!                            */
  gint RH, RW;          /* Reduced height and reduced width                */
  gint width, height;   /* Width and Height of the area being reduced      */
  gint bytes=drawable->bpp;
  ReducedImage *temp=(ReducedImage *)malloc(sizeof(ReducedImage));

  guchar *tempRGB, *src_row, *tempmask, *src_mask_row,R,G,B;
  gint i, j, whichcol, whichrow, x1, x2, y1, y2;
  GPixelRgn srcPR, srcMask;
  gint NoSelectionMade=TRUE; /* Assume that we're dealing with the entire  */
                             /* image.                                     */

  gimp_drawable_mask_bounds (drawable->id, &amp;x1, &amp;y1, &amp;x2, &amp;y2);
  width  = x2-x1;
  height = y2-y1;
  /* If there's a SELECTION, we got its bounds!)

  if (width != drawable->width &amp;&amp; height != drawable->height)
    NoSelectionMade=FALSE;
  /* Become aware of whether the user has made an active selection   */
  /* This will become important later, when creating a reduced mask. */

  /* If we want to preview the entire image, overrule the above!  */
  /* Of course, if no selection has been made, this does nothing! */
  if (Selection==ENTIRE_IMAGE) {
    x1=0;
    x2=drawable->width;
    y1=0;
    y2=drawable->height;
  }

  /* If we want to preview a selection with some surronding area we */
  /* have to expand it a little bit. Consider it a bit of a riddle. */
  if (Selection==SELECTION_IN_CONTEXT) {
    x1=MAX(0,                x1-width/2.0);
    x2=MIN(drawable->width,  x2+width/2.0);
    y1=MAX(0,                y1-height/2.0);
    y2=MIN(drawable->height, y2+height/2.0);
  }

  /* How we can determine the width and the height of the area being */
  /* reduced.                                                        */
  width  = x2-x1;
  height = y2-y1;

  /* The lines below determine which dimension is to be the longer   */
  /* side. The idea borrowed from the supernova plug-in. I suspect I */
  /* could've thought of it myself, but the truth must be told.      */
  /* Plagiarism stinks!                                               */
  if (width>height) {
    RW=LongerSize;
    RH=(float) height * (float) LongerSize/ (float) width;
  }
  else {
    RH=LongerSize;
    RW=(float)width * (float) LongerSize/ (float) height;
  }

  /* The intire image is stretched into a string! */
  tempRGB   = (guchar *) malloc(RW*RH*bytes);
  tempmask  = (guchar *) malloc(RW*RH);

  gimp_pixel_rgn_init (&amp;srcPR, drawable, x1, y1, width, height, FALSE, FALSE);
  gimp_pixel_rgn_init (&amp;srcMask, mask, x1, y1, width, height, FALSE, FALSE);

  /* Grab enough to save a row of image and a row of mask. */
  src_row       = (guchar *) malloc (width*bytes);
  src_mask_row  = (guchar *) malloc (width);

  for (i=0; i < RH; i++) {
    whichrow=(float)i*(float)height/(float)RH;
    gimp_pixel_rgn_get_row (&amp;srcPR, src_row, x1, y1+whichrow, width);
    gimp_pixel_rgn_get_row (&amp;srcMask, src_mask_row, x1, y1+whichrow, width);

    for (j=0; j < RW; j++) {
      whichcol=(float)j*(float)width/(float)RW;

      /* No selection made = each point is completely selected! */
      if (NoSelectionMade)
        tempmask[i*RW+j]=255;
      else
        tempmask[i*RW+j]=src_mask_row[whichcol];

      /* Add the row to the one long string which now contains the image! */
      tempRGB[i*RW*bytes+j*bytes+0]=src_row[whichcol*bytes+0];
      tempRGB[i*RW*bytes+j*bytes+1]=src_row[whichcol*bytes+1];
      tempRGB[i*RW*bytes+j*bytes+2]=src_row[whichcol*bytes+2];

      /* Hold on to the alpha as well */
      if (bytes==4)
        tempRGB[i*RW*bytes+j*bytes+3]=src_row[whichcol*bytes+3];
    }
  }
  temp->bpp=bytes;
  temp->width=RW;
  temp->height=RH;
  temp->rgb=tempRGB;
  temp->mask=tempmask;
  return temp;
}

The following is a preview function which used the same ReducedImage type!
Note that it uses fakes transparancy (if one is present by means of
fake_transparancy which is defined as follows:

gint fake_transparency(gint i, gint j)
{
  if ( ((i%20)- 10) * ((j%20)- 10)>0   )
    return 64;
  else
    return 196;
}

Now here's the preview function:

void
my_preview_render_function(GtkWidget     *preview,
                           gint          changewhat,
                           gint          changewhich)
{
  gint Inten, bytes=drawable->bpp;
  gint i, j, k;
  float partial;
  gint RW=reduced->width;
  gint RH=reduced->height;
  guchar *row=malloc(bytes*RW);;


  for (i=0; i < RH; i++) {
    for (j=0; j < RW; j++) {

      row[j*3+0] = reduced->rgb[i*RW*bytes + j*bytes + 0];
      row[j*3+1] = reduced->rgb[i*RW*bytes + j*bytes + 1];
      row[j*3+2] = reduced->rgb[i*RW*bytes + j*bytes + 2];

      if (bytes==4)
        for (k=0; k<3; k++) {
          float transp=reduced->rgb[i*RW*bytes+j*bytes+3]/255.0;
          row[3*j+k]=transp*a[3*j+k]+(1-transp)*fake_transparency(i,j);
        }
    }
    gtk_preview_draw_row( GTK_PREVIEW(preview),row,0,i,RW);
  }

  free(a);
  gtk_widget_draw(preview,NULL);
  gdk_flush();
}

Applicable Routines

guint           gtk_preview_get_type           (void);
/* No idea */
void            gtk_preview_uninit             (void);
/* No idea */
GtkWidget*      gtk_preview_new                (GtkPreviewType   type);
/* Described above */
void            gtk_preview_size               (GtkPreview      *preview,
                                                gint             width,
                                                gint             height);
/* Allows you to resize an existing preview.    */
/* Apparantly there's a bug in GTK which makes  */
/* this process messy. A way to clean up a mess */
/* is to manually resize the window containing  */
/* the preview after resizing the preview.      */

void            gtk_preview_put                (GtkPreview      *preview,
                                                GdkWindow       *window,
                                                GdkGC           *gc,
                                                gint             srcx,
                                                gint             srcy,
                                                gint             destx,
                                                gint             desty,
                                                gint             width,
                                                gint             height);
/* No idea */

void            gtk_preview_put_row            (GtkPreview      *preview,
                                                guchar          *src,
                                                guchar          *dest,
                                                gint             x,
                                                gint             y,
                                                gint             w);
/* No idea */

void            gtk_preview_draw_row           (GtkPreview      *preview,
                                                guchar          *data,
                                                gint             x,
                                                gint             y,
                                                gint             w);
/* Described in the text */

void            gtk_preview_set_expand         (GtkPreview      *preview,
                                                gint             expand);
/* No idea */

/* No clue for any of the below but    */
/* should be standard for most widgets */
void            gtk_preview_set_gamma          (double           gamma);
void            gtk_preview_set_color_cube     (guint            nred_shades,
                                                guint            ngreen_shades,
                                                guint            nblue_shades,
                                                guint            ngray_shades);
void            gtk_preview_set_install_cmap   (gint             install_cmap);
void            gtk_preview_set_reserved       (gint             nreserved);
GdkVisual*      gtk_preview_get_visual         (void);
GdkColormap*    gtk_preview_get_cmap           (void);
GtkPreviewInfo* gtk_preview_get_info           (void);

That's all, folks!

</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Curves
<p>

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>The EventBox Widget<label id="sec_The_EventBox_Widget">
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<p> 
Some gtk widgets don't have associated X windows, so they just draw on 
thier parents.  Because of this, they cannot recieve events
and if they are incorrectly sized, they don't clip so you can get
messy overwritting etc.  If you require more from these widgets, the
EventBox is for you.

At first glance, the EventBox widget might appear to be totally
useless. It draws nothing on the screen and responds to no
events.  However, it does serve a function - it provides an X window for
its child widget. This is important as many GTK widgets do not
have an associated X window.  Not having an X window saves memory and
improves performance, but also has some drawbacks. A widget without an
X window cannot receive events, and does not perform any clipping on
it's contents. Although the name ``EventBox'' emphasizes the
event-handling function, the widget also can be used for clipping. 
(And more ... see the example below.)

<p>
To create a new EventBox widget, use:

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_event_box_new (void);
</verb></tscreen>

<p>
A child widget can then be added to this EventBox:

<tscreen><verb>
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(event_box), widget);
</verb></tscreen>

<p>
The following example demonstrates both uses of an EventBox - a label
is created that clipped to a small box, and set up so that a
mouse-click on the label causes the program to exit.

<tscreen><verb>
/* eventbox.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>

int 
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
    GtkWidget *window;
    GtkWidget *event_box;
    GtkWidget *label;
    
    gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
    
    window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
    
    gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Event Box");
    
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_exit), NULL);
    
    gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
    
    /* Create an EventBox and add it to our toplevel window */
    
    event_box = gtk_event_box_new ();
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(window), event_box);
    gtk_widget_show (event_box);
    
    /* Create a long label */
    
    label = gtk_label_new ("Click here to quit, quit, quit, quit, quit");
    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (event_box), label);
    gtk_widget_show (label);
    
    /* Clip it short. */
    gtk_widget_set_usize (label, 110, 20);
    
    /* And bind an action to it */
    gtk_widget_set_events (event_box, GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK);
    gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(event_box), "button_press_event",
			GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_exit), NULL);
    
    /* Yet one more thing you need an X window for ... */
    
    gtk_widget_realize (event_box);
    gdk_window_set_cursor (event_box->window, gdk_cursor_new (GDK_HAND1));
    
    gtk_widget_show (window);
    
    gtk_main ();
    
    return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Setting Widget Attributes<label id="sec_setting_widget_attributes">
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<p>
This describes the functions used to operate on widgets.  These can be used
to set style, padding, size etc.

(Maybe I should make a whole section on accelerators.)

<tscreen><verb>
void       gtk_widget_install_accelerator (GtkWidget           *widget,
					   GtkAcceleratorTable *table,
					   gchar               *signal_name,
					   gchar                key,
					   guint8               modifiers);

void       gtk_widget_remove_accelerator  (GtkWidget           *widget,
					   GtkAcceleratorTable *table,
					   gchar               *signal_name);

void       gtk_widget_activate            (GtkWidget           *widget);

void       gtk_widget_set_name            (GtkWidget           *widget,
					   gchar               *name);
gchar*     gtk_widget_get_name            (GtkWidget           *widget);

void       gtk_widget_set_sensitive       (GtkWidget           *widget,
					   gint                 sensitive);

void       gtk_widget_set_style           (GtkWidget           *widget,
					   GtkStyle            *style);
					   
GtkStyle*    gtk_widget_get_style     (GtkWidget *widget);

GtkStyle*    gtk_widget_get_default_style    (void);

void       gtk_widget_set_uposition       (GtkWidget           *widget,
					   gint                 x,
					   gint                 y);
void       gtk_widget_set_usize           (GtkWidget           *widget,
					   gint                 width,
					   gint                 height);

void       gtk_widget_grab_focus          (GtkWidget           *widget);

void       gtk_widget_show                (GtkWidget           *widget);

void       gtk_widget_hide                (GtkWidget           *widget);
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Timeouts, IO and Idle Functions<label id="sec_timeouts">
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Timeouts
<p>
You may be wondering how you make GTK do useful work when in gtk_main.
Well, you have several options.  Using the following functions you can
create a timeout function that will be called every "interval" milliseconds.

<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_timeout_add (guint32 interval,
		      GtkFunction function,
		      gpointer data);
</verb></tscreen>

The first argument is the number of milliseconds
between calls to your function.  The second argument is the function
you wish to have called, and
the third, the data passed to this callback function.  The return value is
an integer "tag" which may be used to stop the timeout by calling:

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_timeout_remove (gint tag);
</verb></tscreen>

You may also stop the timeout function by returning zero or FALSE from
your callback function.  Obviously this means if you want your function to
continue to be called, it should return a non-zero value, ie TRUE.

The declaration of your callback should look something like this:

<tscreen><verb>
gint timeout_callback (gpointer data);
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Monitoring IO
<p>
Another nifty feature of GTK, is the ability to have it check for data on a
file descriptor for you (as returned by open(2) or socket(2)).	This is
especially useful for networking applications.	The function:

<tscreen><verb>
gint gdk_input_add (gint source,
		    GdkInputCondition condition,
		    GdkInputFunction  function,
		    gpointer data);
</verb></tscreen>

Where the first argument is the file descriptor you wish to have watched,
and the second specifies what you want GDK to look for.  This may be one of:
<p>
GDK_INPUT_READ - Call your function when there is data ready for reading on
your file descriptor.
<p>
GDK_INPUT_WRITE - Call your function when the file descriptor is ready for
writing.
<p>
As I'm sure you've figured out already, the third argument is the function
you wish to have called when the above conditions are satisfied, and the
fourth is the data to pass to this function.
<p>
The return value is a tag that may be used to stop GDK from monitoring this
file descriptor using the following function.
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
void gdk_input_remove (gint tag);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
The callback function should be declared:
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
void input_callback (gpointer data, gint source, 
                     GdkInputCondition condition);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Idle Functions
<p>
What if you have a function you want called when nothing else is
happening ?

<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_idle_add (GtkFunction function,
		   gpointer data);
</verb></tscreen>

This causes GTK to call the specified function whenever nothing else is
happening.

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_idle_remove (gint tag);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
I won't explain the meaning of the arguments as they follow very much like
the ones above.  The function pointed to by the first argument to
gtk_idle_add will be called whenever the opportunity arises.  As with the
others, returning FALSE will stop the idle function from being called.

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Managing Selections
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Overview

<p>

One type of interprocess communication supported by GTK is
<em>selections</em>. A selection identifies a chunk of data, for
instance, a portion of text, selected by the user in some fashion, for
instance, by dragging with the mouse. Only one application on a
display, (he <em>owner</em>_ can own a particular selection at one
time, so when a selection is claimed by one application, the previous
owner must indicate to the user that selection has been
relinquished. Other applications can request the contents of a
selection in different forms, called <em>targets</em>.  There can be
any number of selections, but most X applications only handle one, the
<em>primary selection</em>.

<p>
In most cases, it isn't necessary for a GTK application to deal with
selections itself. The standard widgets, such as the Entry widget,
already have the capability to claim the selection when appropriate
(e.g., when the user drags over text), and to retrieve the contents of
the selection owned by another widget, or another application (e.g.,
when the user clicks the second mouse button). However, there may be
cases in which you want to give other widgets the ability to supply
the selection, or you wish to retrieve targets not supported by
default.

<p>
A fundamental concept needed to understand selection handling is that
of the <em>atom</em>. An atom is an integer that uniquely identifies a
string (on a certain display). Certain atoms are predefined by the X
server, and in some cases there are constants in in <tt>gtk.h</tt>
corresponding to these atoms. For instance the constant
<tt>GDK_PRIMARY_SELECTION</tt> corresponds to the string "PRIMARY".
In other cases, you should use the functions
<tt>gdk_atom_intern()</tt>, to get the atom corresponding to a string,
and <tt>gdk_atom_name()</tt>, to get the name of an atom. Both
selections and targets are identifed by atoms.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Retrieving the selection

<p>

Retrieving the selection is an asynchronous process. To start the
process, you call:

<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_selection_convert   (GtkWidget 	  *widget, 
			      GdkAtom    	   selection, 
			      GdkAtom    	   target,
			      guint32    	   time)
</verb</tscreen>

This <em>converts</em> the selection into the form specified by
<tt/target/. If it all possible, the time field should be the time
from the event that triggered the selection. This helps make sure that
events occur in the order that the user requested them.
 However, if it is not available (for instance, if the conversion was
triggered by a "clicked" signal), then you can use the constant
<tt>GDK_CURRENT_TIME</tt>.

<p>
When the selection owner responds to the request, a
"selection_received" signal is sent to your application. The handler
for this signal receives a pointer to a <tt>GtkSelectionData</tt>
structure, which is defined as:

<tscreen><verb>
struct _GtkSelectionData
{
  GdkAtom selection;
  GdkAtom target;
  GdkAtom type;
  gint    format;
  guchar *data;
  gint    length;
};
</verb></tscreen>

<tt>selection</tt> and <tt>target</tt> are the values you gave in your
<tt>gtk_selection_convert()</tt> call. <tt>type</tt> is an atom that
identifies the type of data returned by the selection owner. Some
possible values are "STRING", a string of latin-1 characters, "ATOM",
a series of atoms, "INTEGER", an integer, etc. Most targets can only
return one type. <tt/format/ gives the length of the units (for
instance characters) in bits. Usually, you don't care about this when
receiving data.  <tt>data</tt> is a pointer to the returned data, and
<tt>length</tt> gives the length of the returned data, in bytes. If
<tt>length</tt> is negative, then an error occurred and the selection
could not be retrieved. This might happen if no application owned the
selection, or if you requested a target that the application didn't
support. The buffer is actually guaranteed to be one byte longer than
<tt>length</tt>; the extra byte will always be zero, so it isn't
necessary to make a copy of strings just to null terminate them.

<p>
In the following example, we retrieve the special target "TARGETS",
which is a list of all targets into which the selection can be
converted.

<tscreen><verb>
/* gettargets.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>

void selection_received (GtkWidget *widget, 
			 GtkSelectionData *selection_data, 
			 gpointer data);

/* Signal handler invoked when user clicks on the "Get Targets" button */
void
get_targets (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
  static GdkAtom targets_atom = GDK_NONE;

  /* Get the atom corresonding to the string "TARGETS" */
  if (targets_atom == GDK_NONE)
    targets_atom = gdk_atom_intern ("TARGETS", FALSE);

  /* And request the "TARGETS" target for the primary selection */
  gtk_selection_convert (widget, GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, targets_atom,
			 GDK_CURRENT_TIME);
}

/* Signal handler called when the selections owner returns the data */
void
selection_received (GtkWidget *widget, GtkSelectionData *selection_data, 
		    gpointer data)
{
  GdkAtom *atoms;
  GList *item_list;
  int i;

  /* **** IMPORTANT **** Check to see if retrieval succeeded  */
  if (selection_data->length < 0)
    {
      g_print ("Selection retrieval failed\n");
      return;
    }
  /* Make sure we got the data in the expected form */
  if (selection_data->type != GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_ATOM)
    {
      g_print ("Selection \"TARGETS\" was not returned as atoms!\n");
      return;
    }
  
  /* Print out the atoms we received */
  atoms = (GdkAtom *)selection_data->data;

  item_list = NULL;
  for (i=0; i<selection_data->length/sizeof(GdkAtom); i++)
    {
      char *name;
      name = gdk_atom_name (atoms[i]);
      if (name != NULL)
	g_print ("%s\n",name);
      else
	g_print ("(bad atom)\n");
    }

  return;
}

int 
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
  GtkWidget *window;
  GtkWidget *button;
  
  gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);

  /* Create the toplevel window */

  window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
  gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Event Box");
  gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);

  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
		      GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_exit), NULL);

  /* Create a button the user can click to get targets */

  button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Get Targets");
  gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), button);

  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(button), "clicked",
		      GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (get_targets), NULL);
  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(button), "selection_received",
		      GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (selection_received), NULL);

  gtk_widget_show (button);
  gtk_widget_show (window);
  
  gtk_main ();
  
  return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Supplying the selection 

<p>

Supplying the selection is a bit more complicated. You must register 
handlers that will be called when your selection is requested. For
each selection/target pair you will handle, you make a call to:

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_selection_add_handler (GtkWidget           *widget, 
				GdkAtom              selection,
				GdkAtom              target,
				GtkSelectionFunction function,
				GtkRemoveFunction    remove_func,
				gpointer             data);
</verb></tscreen>

<tt/widget/, <tt/selection/, and <tt/target/ identify the requests
this handler will manage.  <tt/remove_func/ if not
NULL, will be called when the signal handler is removed. This is
useful, for instance, for interpreted languages which need to
keep track of a reference count for <tt/data/.

<p>
The callback function has the signature:

<tscreen><verb>
typedef void (*GtkSelectionFunction) (GtkWidget *widget, 
                                      GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
				      gpointer data);

</verb></tscreen>

The GtkSelectionData is the same as above, but this time, we're
responsible for filling in the fields <tt/type/, <tt/format/,
<tt/data/, and <tt/length/. (The <tt/format/ field is actually
important here - the X server uses it to figure out whether the data
needs to be byte-swapped or not. Usually it will be 8 - <em/i.e./ a
character - or 32 - <em/i.e./ a. integer.) This is done by calling the
function:

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_selection_data_set (GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
			     GdkAtom           type,
			     gint              format,
			     guchar           *data,
			     gint              length);
</verb></tscreen>

This function takes care of properly making a copy of the data so that
you don't have to worry about keeping it around. (You should not fill
in the fields of the GtkSelectionData structure by hand.)

<p>
When prompted by the user, you claim ownership of the selection by
calling:

<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_selection_owner_set (GtkWidget 	  *widget,
			      GdkAtom    	   selection,
			      guint32    	   time);
</verb></tscreen>

If another application claims ownership of the selection, you will
receive a "selection_clear_event".

As an example of supplying the selection, the following program adds
selection functionality to a toggle button. When the toggle button is
depressed, the program claims the primary selection. The only target
supported (aside from certain targets like "TARGETS" supplied by GTK
itself), is the "STRING" target. When this target is requested, a
string representation of the time is returned.

<tscreen><verb>
/* setselection.c */

#include <gtk/gtk.h>
#include <time.h>

/* Callback when the user toggles the selection */
void
selection_toggled (GtkWidget *widget, gint *have_selection)
{
  if (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(widget)->active)
    {
      *have_selection = gtk_selection_owner_set (widget,
						 GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY,
						 GDK_CURRENT_TIME);
      /* if claiming the selection failed, we return the button to
	 the out state */
      if (!*have_selection)
	gtk_toggle_button_set_state (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(widget), FALSE);
    }
  else
    {
      if (*have_selection)
	{
	  /* Before clearing the selection by setting the owner to NULL,
	     we check if we are the actual owner */
	  if (gdk_selection_owner_get (GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY) == widget->window)
	    gtk_selection_owner_set (NULL, GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY,
				     GDK_CURRENT_TIME);
	  *have_selection = FALSE;
	}
    }
}

/* Called when another application claims the selection */
gint
selection_clear (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventSelection *event,
		 gint *have_selection)
{
  *have_selection = FALSE;
  gtk_toggle_button_set_state (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(widget), FALSE);

  return TRUE;
}

/* Supplies the current time as the selection. */
void
selection_handle (GtkWidget *widget, 
		  GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
		  gpointer data)
{
  gchar *timestr;
  time_t current_time;

  current_time = time (NULL);
  timestr = asctime (localtime(&amp;current_time)); 
  /* When we return a single string, it should not be null terminated.
     That will be done for us */

  gtk_selection_data_set (selection_data, GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_STRING,
			  8, timestr, strlen(timestr));
}

int
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
  GtkWidget *window;

  GtkWidget *selection_button;

  static int have_selection = FALSE;
  
  gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);

  /* Create the toplevel window */

  window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
  gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Event Box");
  gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);

  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
		      GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_exit), NULL);

  /* Create a toggle button to act as the selection */

  selection_button = gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label ("Claim Selection");
  gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), selection_button);
  gtk_widget_show (selection_button);

  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(selection_button), "toggled",
		      GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (selection_toggled), &amp;have_selection);
  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(selection_button), "selection_clear_event",
		      GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (selection_clear), &amp;have_selection);

  gtk_selection_add_handler (selection_button, GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY,
			     GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_STRING,
			     selection_handle, NULL);

  gtk_widget_show (selection_button);
  gtk_widget_show (window);
  
  gtk_main ();
  
  return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>


<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>glib<label id="sec_glib">
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<p>
glib provides many useful functions and definitions available for use 
when creating GDK
and GTK applications.  I will list them all here with a brief explanation.
Many are duplicates of standard libc functions so I won't go into
detail on those.  This is mostly to be used as a reference, so you know what is
available for use.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Definitions
<p>
Definitions for the extremes of many of the standard types are:

<tscreen><verb>
G_MINFLOAT
G_MAXFLOAT
G_MINDOUBLE
G_MAXDOUBLE
G_MINSHORT
G_MAXSHORT
G_MININT
G_MAXINT
G_MINLONG
G_MAXLONG
</verb></tscreen>

Also, the following typedefs.  The ones left unspecified are dynamically set
depending on the architecture.  Remember to avoid counting on the size of a
pointer if you want to be portable!  Eg, a pointer on an Alpha is 8 bytes, but 4
on Intel.

<tscreen><verb>
char   gchar;
short  gshort;
long   glong;
int    gint;
char   gboolean;

unsigned char   guchar;
unsigned short  gushort;
unsigned long   gulong;
unsigned int    guint;

float   gfloat;
double  gdouble;
long double gldouble;

void* gpointer;

gint8
guint8
gint16
guint16
gint32
guint32
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Doubly Linked Lists
<p>
The following functions are used to create, manage, and destroy doubly
linked lists.  I assume you know what linked lists are, as it is beyond the scope
of this document to explain them.  Of course, it's not required that you
know these for general use of GTK, but they are nice to know.

<tscreen><verb>
GList* g_list_alloc       (void);

void   g_list_free        (GList     *list);

void   g_list_free_1      (GList     *list);

GList* g_list_append      (GList     *list,
                           gpointer   data);
			   
GList* g_list_prepend     (GList     *list,
                           gpointer   data);
			
GList* g_list_insert      (GList     *list,
                           gpointer   data,
			   gint       position);

GList* g_list_remove      (GList     *list,
                           gpointer   data);
			   
GList* g_list_remove_link (GList     *list,
                           GList     *link);

GList* g_list_reverse     (GList     *list);

GList* g_list_nth         (GList     *list,
                           gint       n);
			   
GList* g_list_find        (GList     *list,
                           gpointer   data);

GList* g_list_last        (GList     *list);

GList* g_list_first       (GList     *list);

gint   g_list_length      (GList     *list);

void   g_list_foreach     (GList     *list,
                           GFunc      func,
			   gpointer   user_data);
</verb></tscreen>					      

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Singly Linked Lists
<p>
Many of the above functions for singly linked lists are identical to the
above.  Here is a complete list:
<tscreen><verb>
GSList* g_slist_alloc       (void);

void    g_slist_free        (GSList   *list);

void    g_slist_free_1      (GSList   *list);

GSList* g_slist_append      (GSList   *list,
                             gpointer  data);
		
GSList* g_slist_prepend     (GSList   *list,
                             gpointer  data);
			     
GSList* g_slist_insert      (GSList   *list,
                             gpointer  data,
		             gint      position);
			     
GSList* g_slist_remove      (GSList   *list,
                             gpointer  data);
			     
GSList* g_slist_remove_link (GSList   *list,
                             GSList   *link);
			     
GSList* g_slist_reverse     (GSList   *list);

GSList* g_slist_nth         (GSList   *list,
                             gint      n);
			     
GSList* g_slist_find        (GSList   *list,
                             gpointer  data);
			     
GSList* g_slist_last        (GSList   *list);

gint    g_slist_length      (GSList   *list);

void    g_slist_foreach     (GSList   *list,
                             GFunc     func,
			     gpointer  user_data);
	
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Memory Management
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
gpointer g_malloc      (gulong    size);
</verb></tscreen>

This is a replacement for malloc().  You do not need to check the return
vaule as it is done for you in this function.

<tscreen><verb>
gpointer g_malloc0     (gulong    size);
</verb></tscreen>

Same as above, but zeroes the memory before returning a pointer to it.

<tscreen><verb>
gpointer g_realloc     (gpointer  mem,
                        gulong    size);
</verb></tscreen>

Relocates "size" bytes of memory starting at "mem".  Obviously, the memory should have been
previously allocated.

<tscreen><verb>
void     g_free        (gpointer  mem);
</verb></tscreen>

Frees memory.  Easy one.

<tscreen><verb>
void     g_mem_profile (void);
</verb></tscreen>

Dumps a profile of used memory, but requries that you add #define
MEM_PROFILE to the top of glib/gmem.c and re-make and make install.

<tscreen><verb>
void     g_mem_check   (gpointer  mem);
</verb></tscreen>

Checks that a memory location is valid.  Requires you add #define
MEM_CHECK to the top of gmem.c and re-make and make install.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Timers
<p>
Timer functions..

<tscreen><verb>
GTimer* g_timer_new     (void);

void    g_timer_destroy (GTimer  *timer);

void    g_timer_start   (GTimer  *timer);

void    g_timer_stop    (GTimer  *timer);

void    g_timer_reset   (GTimer  *timer);

gdouble g_timer_elapsed (GTimer  *timer,
                         gulong  *microseconds);
</verb></tscreen>			 

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>String Handling
<p>
A whole mess of string handling functions.  They all look very interesting, and
probably better for many purposes than the standard C string functions, but
require documentation.

<tscreen><verb>
GString* g_string_new       (gchar   *init);
void     g_string_free      (GString *string,
                             gint     free_segment);
			     
GString* g_string_assign    (GString *lval,
                             gchar   *rval);
			     
GString* g_string_truncate  (GString *string,
                             gint     len);
			     
GString* g_string_append    (GString *string,
                             gchar   *val);
			    
GString* g_string_append_c  (GString *string,
                             gchar    c);
	
GString* g_string_prepend   (GString *string,
                             gchar   *val);
			     
GString* g_string_prepend_c (GString *string,
                             gchar    c);
	
void     g_string_sprintf   (GString *string,
                             gchar   *fmt,
			     ...);
	
void     g_string_sprintfa  (GString *string,
                             gchar   *fmt,
			     ...);
</verb></tscreen>							  

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Utility and Error Functions
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
gchar* g_strdup    (const gchar *str);
</verb></tscreen>

Replacement strdup function.  Copies the
original strings contents to newly allocated memory, and returns a pointer to it.

<tscreen><verb>
gchar* g_strerror  (gint errnum);
</verb></tscreen>

I recommend using this for all error messages.  It's much nicer, and more
portable than perror() or others.  The output is usually of the form:

<tscreen><verb>
program name:function that failed:file or further description:strerror
</verb></tscreen>

Here's an example of one such call used in our hello_world program:

<tscreen><verb>
g_print("hello_world:open:%s:%s\n", filename, g_strerror(errno));
</verb></tscreen>

<tscreen><verb>
void g_error   (gchar *format, ...);
</verb></tscreen>

Prints an error message.  The format is just like printf, but it
prepends "** ERROR **: " to your message, and exits the program.  
Use only for fatal errors.

<tscreen><verb>
void g_warning (gchar *format, ...);
</verb></tscreen>

Same as above, but prepends "** WARNING **: ", and does not exit the
program.

<tscreen><verb>
void g_message (gchar *format, ...);
</verb></tscreen>

Prints "message: " prepended to the string you pass in.

<tscreen><verb>
void g_print   (gchar *format, ...);
</verb></tscreen>

Replacement for printf().

And our last function:

<tscreen><verb>
gchar* g_strsignal (gint signum);
</verb></tscreen>

Prints out the name of the Unix system signal given the signal number.
Useful in generic signal handling functions.

All of the above are more or less just stolen from glib.h.  If anyone cares
to document any function, just send me an email!

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>GTK's rc Files
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<p>
GTK has it's own way of dealing with application defaults, by using rc
files.  These can be used to set the colors of just about any widget, and
can also be used to tile pixmaps onto the background of some widgets.  

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Functions For rc Files 
<p>
When your application starts, you should include a call to:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_rc_parse (char *filename);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Passing in the filename of your rc file.  This will cause GTK to parse this
file, and use the style settings for the widget types defined there.
<p>
If you wish to have a special set of widgets that can take on a different
style from others, or any other logical division of widgets, use a call to:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_widget_set_name (GtkWidget *widget,
                          gchar *name);
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Passing your newly created widget as the first argument, and the name
you wish to give it as the second.  This will allow you to change the
attributes of this widget by name through the rc file.
<p>
If we use a call something like this:

<tscreen><verb>
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Special Button");
gtk_widget_set_name (button, "special button");
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Then this button is given the name "special button" and may be addressed by
name in the rc file as "special button.GtkButton".  [<--- Verify ME!]
<p>
The example rc file below, sets the properties of the main window, and lets
all children of that main window inherit the style described by the "main
button" style.  The code used in the application is:

<tscreen><verb>
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_widget_set_name (window, "main window");
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
And then the style is defined in the rc file using:

<tscreen><verb>
widget "main window.*GtkButton*" style "main_button"
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Which sets all the GtkButton widgets in the "main window" to the
"main_buttons" style as defined in the rc file.
<p>
As you can see, this is a fairly powerful and flexible system.  Use your
imagination as to how best to take advantage of this.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>GTK's rc File Format
<p>
The format of the GTK file is illustrated in the example below.  This is
the testgtkrc file from the GTK distribution, but I've added a
few comments and things.  You may wish to include this explanation
your application to allow the user to fine tune his application.
<p>
There are several directives to change the attributes of a widget.
<itemize>
<item>fg - Sets the foreground color of a widget.
<item>bg - Sets the background color of a widget.
<item>bg_pixmap - Sets the background of a widget to a tiled pixmap.
<item>font - Sets the font to be used with the given widget.
</itemize>
<p>
In addition to this, there are several states a widget can be in, and you
can set different colors, pixmaps and fonts for each state.  These states are:
<itemize>
<item>NORMAL - The normal state of a widget, without the mouse over top of
it, and not being pressed etc.
<item>PRELIGHT - When the mouse is over top of the widget, colors defined
using this state will be in effect.
<item>ACTIVE - When the widget is pressed or clicked it will be active, and
the attributes assigned by this tag will be in effect.
<item>INSENSITIVE - When a widget is set insensitive, and cannot be
activated, it will take these attributes.
<item>SELECTED - When an object is selected, it takes these attributes.
</itemize>
<p>
When using the "fg" and "bg" keywords to set the colors of widgets, the
format is:
<tscreen><verb>
fg[<STATE>] = { Red, Green, Blue }
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Where STATE is one of the above states (PRELIGHT, ACTIVE etc), and the Red,
Green and Blue are values in the range of 0 - 1.0,  { 1.0, 1.0, 1.0 } being
white.
They must be in float form, or they will register as 0, so a straight 
"1" will not work, it must
be "1.0".  A straight "0" is fine because it doesn't matter if it's not
recognized.  Unrecognized values are set to 0.
<p>
bg_pixmap is very similar to the above, except the colors are replaced by a
filename.

pixmap_path is a list of paths seperated by ":"'s.  These paths will be
searched for any pixmap you specify.

<p>
The font directive is simply:
<tscreen><verb>
font = "<font name>"
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Where the only hard part is figuring out the font string.  Using xfontsel or
similar utility should help.
<p>
The "widget_class" sets the style of a class of widgets.  These classes are
listed in the widget overview on the class hierarchy.
<p>
The "widget" directive sets a specificaly named set of widgets to a
given style, overriding any style set for the given widget class.
These widgets are registered inside the application using the
gtk_widget_set_name() call.  This allows you to specify the attributes of a
widget on a per widget basis, rather than setting the attributes of an
entire widget class.  I urge you to document any of these special widgets so
users may customize them.
<p>
When the keyword "<tt>parent</>" is used as an attribute, the widget will take on
the attributes of it's parent in the application.
<p>
When defining a style, you may assign the attributes of a previously defined
style to this new one.
<tscreen><verb>
style "main_button" = "button"
{
  font = "-adobe-helvetica-medium-r-normal--*-100-*-*-*-*-*-*"
  bg[PRELIGHT] = { 0.75, 0, 0 }
}
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
This example takes the "button" style, and creates a new "main_button" style
simply by changing the font and prelight background color of the "button"
style.
<p>
Of course, many of these attributes don't apply to all widgets.  It's a
simple matter of common sense really.  Anything that could apply, should.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Example rc file
<p>

<tscreen><verb>
# pixmap_path "<dir 1>:<dir 2>:<dir 3>:..."
#
pixmap_path "/usr/include/X11R6/pixmaps:/home/imain/pixmaps"
#
# style <name> [= <name>]
# {
#   <option>
# }
#
# widget <widget_set> style <style_name>
# widget_class <widget_class_set> style <style_name>


# Here is a list of all the possible states.  Note that some do not apply to
# certain widgets.
#
# NORMAL - The normal state of a widget, without the mouse over top of
# it, and not being pressed etc.
#
# PRELIGHT - When the mouse is over top of the widget, colors defined
# using this state will be in effect.
#
# ACTIVE - When the widget is pressed or clicked it will be active, and
# the attributes assigned by this tag will be in effect.
#
# INSENSITIVE - When a widget is set insensitive, and cannot be
# activated, it will take these attributes.
#
# SELECTED - When an object is selected, it takes these attributes.
#
# Given these states, we can set the attributes of the widgets in each of
# these states using the following directives.
#
# fg - Sets the foreground color of a widget.
# fg - Sets the background color of a widget.
# bg_pixmap - Sets the background of a widget to a tiled pixmap.
# font - Sets the font to be used with the given widget.
#

# This sets a style called "button".  The name is not really important, as
# it is assigned to the actual widgets at the bottom of the file.

style "window"
{
  #This sets the padding around the window to the pixmap specified.
  #bg_pixmap[<STATE>] = "<pixmap filename>"
  bg_pixmap[NORMAL] = "warning.xpm"
}

style "scale"
{
  #Sets the foreground color (font color) to red when in the "NORMAL"
  #state.
  
  fg[NORMAL] = { 1.0, 0, 0 }
  
  #Sets the background pixmap of this widget to that of it's parent.
  bg_pixmap[NORMAL] = "<parent>"
}

style "button"
{
  # This shows all the possible states for a button.  The only one that
  # doesn't apply is the SELECTED state.
  
  fg[PRELIGHT] = { 0, 1.0, 1.0 }
  bg[PRELIGHT] = { 0, 0, 1.0 }
  bg[ACTIVE] = { 1.0, 0, 0 }
  fg[ACTIVE] = { 0, 1.0, 0 }
  bg[NORMAL] = { 1.0, 1.0, 0 }
  fg[NORMAL] = { .99, 0, .99 }
  bg[INSENSITIVE] = { 1.0, 1.0, 1.0 }
  fg[INSENSITIVE] = { 1.0, 0, 1.0 }
}

# In this example, we inherit the attributes of the "button" style and then
# override the font and background color when prelit to create a new
# "main_button" style.

style "main_button" = "button"
{
  font = "-adobe-helvetica-medium-r-normal--*-100-*-*-*-*-*-*"
  bg[PRELIGHT] = { 0.75, 0, 0 }
}

style "toggle_button" = "button"
{
  fg[NORMAL] = { 1.0, 0, 0 }
  fg[ACTIVE] = { 1.0, 0, 0 }
  
  # This sets the background pixmap of the toggle_button to that of it's
  # parent widget (as defined in the application).
  bg_pixmap[NORMAL] = "<parent>"
}

style "text"
{
  bg_pixmap[NORMAL] = "marble.xpm"
  fg[NORMAL] = { 1.0, 1.0, 1.0 }
}

style "ruler"
{
  font = "-adobe-helvetica-medium-r-normal--*-80-*-*-*-*-*-*"
}

# pixmap_path "~/.pixmaps"

# These set the widget types to use the styles defined above.
# The widget types are listed in the class hierarchy, but could probably be
# just listed in this document for the users reference.

widget_class "GtkWindow" style "window"
widget_class "GtkDialog" style "window"
widget_class "GtkFileSelection" style "window"
widget_class "*Gtk*Scale" style "scale"
widget_class "*GtkCheckButton*" style "toggle_button"
widget_class "*GtkRadioButton*" style "toggle_button"
widget_class "*GtkButton*" style "button"
widget_class "*Ruler" style "ruler"
widget_class "*GtkText" style "text"

# This sets all the buttons that are children of the "main window" to
# the main_buton style.  These must be documented to be taken advantage of.
widget "main window.*GtkButton*" style "main_button"
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Writing Your Own Widgets 
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Overview
<p>
Although the GTK distribution comes with many types of widgets that
should cover most basic needs, there may come a time when you need to
create your own new widget type. Since GTK uses widget inheretence
extensively, and there is already a widget that
is close to what you want, it is often possible to make a useful new widget type in
just a few lines of code.  But before starting work on a new widget, check
around first to make sure that someone has not already written
it. This will prevent duplication of effort and keep the number of
GTK widgets out there to a minimum, which will help keep both the code
and the interface of different applications consistent. As a flip side
to this, once you finish your widget, announce it to the world so
other people can benefit. The best place to do this is probably the
<tt>gtk-list</tt>.

Complete sources for the example widgets are available at the place you 
got this tutorial, or from:

<htmlurl url="http://www.msc.cornell.edu/~otaylor/gtk-gimp/tutorial"
name="http://www.msc.cornell.edu/~otaylor/gtk-gimp/tutorial">


<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> The Anatomy Of A Widget

<p>
In order to create a new widget, it is important to have an
understanding of how GTK objects work. This section is just meant as a
brief overview. See the reference documentation for the details. 

<p>
GTK widgets are implemented in an object oriented fashion. However,
they are implemented in standard C. This greatly improves portability
and stability over using current generation C++ compilers; however,
it does mean that the widget writer has to pay attention to some of
the implementation details. The information common to all instances of
one class of widgets (e.g., to all Button widgets) is stored in the 
<em>class structure</em>. There is only one copy of this in
which is stored information about the class's signals
(which act like virtual functions in C). To support inheritance, the
first field in the class structure must be a copy of the parent's
class structure. The declaration of the class structure of GtkButtton
looks like:

<tscreen><verb>
struct _GtkButtonClass
{
  GtkContainerClass parent_class;

  void (* pressed)  (GtkButton *button);
  void (* released) (GtkButton *button);
  void (* clicked)  (GtkButton *button);
  void (* enter)    (GtkButton *button);
  void (* leave)    (GtkButton *button);
};
</verb></tscreen>

<p>
When a button is treated as a container (for instance, when it is
resized), its class structure can be cast to GtkContainerClass, and
the relevant fields used to handle the signals.

<p>
There is also a structure for each widget that is created on a
per-instance basis. This structure has fields to store information that
is different for each instance of the widget. We'll call this
structure the <em>object structure</em>. For the Button class, it looks
like:

<tscreen><verb>
struct _GtkButton
{
  GtkContainer container;

  GtkWidget *child;

  guint in_button : 1;
  guint button_down : 1;
};
</verb></tscreen>

<p>
Note that, similar to the class structure, the first field is the
object structure of the parent class, so that this structure can be
cast to the parent class's object structure as needed.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Creating a Composite widget

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> Introduction

<p>
One type of widget that you may be interested in creating is a
widget that is merely an aggregate of other GTK widgets. This type of
widget does nothing that couldn't be done without creating new
widgets, but provides a convenient way of packaging user interface
elements for reuse. The FileSelection and ColorSelection widgets in
the standard distribution are examples of this type of widget.

<p>
The example widget that we'll create in this section is the Tictactoe
widget, a 3x3 array of toggle buttons which triggers a signal when all
three buttons in a row, column, or on one of the diagonals are
depressed. 

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> Choosing a parent class

<p>
The parent class for a composite widget is typically the container
class that holds all of the elements of the composite widget. For
example, the parent class of the FileSelection widget is the
Dialog class. Since our buttons will be arranged in a table, it
might seem natural to make our parent class the GtkTable
class. Unfortunately, this turns out not to work. The creation of a
widget is divided among two functions - a <tt/WIDGETNAME_new()/
function that the user calls, and a <tt/WIDGETNAME_init()/ function
which does the basic work of initializing the widget which is
independent of the arguments passed to the <tt/_new()/
function. Descendent widgets only call the <tt/_init/ function of
their parent widget. But this division of labor doesn't work well for
tables, which when created, need to know the number of rows and
columns in the table. Unless we want to duplicate most of the
functionality of <tt/gtk_table_new()/ in our Tictactoe widget, we had
best avoid deriving it from GtkTable. For that reason, we derive it
from GtkVBox instead, and stick our table inside the VBox.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> The header file

<p>
Each widget class has a header file which declares the object and
class structures for that widget, along with public functions. 
A couple of features are worth pointing out. To prevent duplicate
definitions, we wrap the entire header file in:

<tscreen><verb>
#ifndef __TICTACTOE_H__
#define __TICTACTOE_H__
.
.
.
#endif /* __TICTACTOE_H__ */
</verb></tscreen>

And to keep C++ programs that include the header file happy, in:

<tscreen><verb>
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif /* __cplusplus */
.
.
.
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif /* __cplusplus */
</verb></tscreen>

Along with the functions and structures, we declare three standard
macros in our header file, <tt/TICTACTOE(obj)/,
<tt/TICTACTOE_CLASS(klass)/, and <tt/IS_TICTACTOE(obj)/, which cast a
pointer into a pointer to the object or class structure, and check
if an object is a Tictactoe widget respectively.

<p>
Here is the complete header file:

<tscreen><verb>
/* tictactoe.h */

#ifndef __TICTACTOE_H__
#define __TICTACTOE_H__

#include <gdk/gdk.h>
#include <gtk/gtkvbox.h>

#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif /* __cplusplus */

#define TICTACTOE(obj)          GTK_CHECK_CAST (obj, tictactoe_get_type (), Tictactoe)
#define TICTACTOE_CLASS(klass)  GTK_CHECK_CLASS_CAST (klass, tictactoe_get_type (), TictactoeClass)
#define IS_TICTACTOE(obj)       GTK_CHECK_TYPE (obj, tictactoe_get_type ())


typedef struct _Tictactoe       Tictactoe;
typedef struct _TictactoeClass  TictactoeClass;

struct _Tictactoe
{
  GtkVBox vbox;
  
  GtkWidget *buttons[3][3];
};

struct _TictactoeClass
{
  GtkVBoxClass parent_class;

  void (* tictactoe) (Tictactoe *ttt);
};

guint          tictactoe_get_type        (void);
GtkWidget*     tictactoe_new             (void);
void	       tictactoe_clear           (Tictactoe *ttt);

#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif /* __cplusplus */

#endif /* __TICTACTOE_H__ */

</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> The <tt/_get_type()/ function.

<p>
We now continue on to the implementation of our widget. A core
function for every widget is the function
<tt/WIDGETNAME_get_type()/. This function, when first called, tells
GTK about the widget class, and gets an ID that uniquely identifies
the widget class. Upon subsequent calls, it just returns the ID.

<tscreen><verb>
guint
tictactoe_get_type ()
{
  static guint ttt_type = 0;

  if (!ttt_type)
    {
      GtkTypeInfo ttt_info =
      {
	"Tictactoe",
	sizeof (Tictactoe),
	sizeof (TictactoeClass),
	(GtkClassInitFunc) tictactoe_class_init,
	(GtkObjectInitFunc) tictactoe_init,
	(GtkArgSetFunc) NULL,
        (GtkArgGetFunc) NULL
      };

      ttt_type = gtk_type_unique (gtk_vbox_get_type (), &amp;ttt_info);
    }

  return ttt_type;
}
</verb></tscreen>

<p>
The GtkTypeInfo structure has the following definition:

<tscreen><verb>
struct _GtkTypeInfo
{
  gchar *type_name;
  guint object_size;
  guint class_size;
  GtkClassInitFunc class_init_func;
  GtkObjectInitFunc object_init_func;
  GtkArgSetFunc arg_set_func;
  GtkArgGetFunc arg_get_func;
};
</verb></tscreen>

<p>
The fields of this structure are pretty self-explanatory. We'll ignore
the <tt/arg_set_func/ and <tt/arg_get_func/ fields here: they have an important, 
but as yet largely
unimplemented, role in allowing widget options to be conveniently set
from interpreted languages. Once GTK has a correctly filled in copy of
this structure, it knows how to create objects of a particular widget
type. 

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> The <tt/_class_init()/ function

<p>
The <tt/WIDGETNAME_class_init()/ function initializes the fields of
the widget's class structure, and sets up any signals for the
class. For our Tictactoe widget it looks like:

<tscreen><verb>

enum {
  TICTACTOE_SIGNAL,
  LAST_SIGNAL
};

static gint tictactoe_signals[LAST_SIGNAL] = { 0 };

static void
tictactoe_class_init (TictactoeClass *class)
{
  GtkObjectClass *object_class;

  object_class = (GtkObjectClass*) class;
  
  tictactoe_signals[TICTACTOE_SIGNAL] = gtk_signal_new ("tictactoe",
					 GTK_RUN_FIRST,
					 object_class->type,
					 GTK_SIGNAL_OFFSET (TictactoeClass, tictactoe),
					 gtk_signal_default_marshaller, GTK_TYPE_NONE, 0);


  gtk_object_class_add_signals (object_class, tictactoe_signals, LAST_SIGNAL);

  class->tictactoe = NULL;
}
</verb></tscreen>

<p>
Our widget has just one signal, the ``tictactoe'' signal that is
invoked when a row, column, or diagonal is completely filled in. Not
every composite widget needs signals, so if you are reading this for
the first time, you may want to skip to the next section now, as
things are going to get a bit complicated.

The function:

<tscreen><verb>
gint   gtk_signal_new (const gchar         *name,
                       GtkSignalRunType    run_type,
		       GtkType             object_type,
		       gint                function_offset,
		       GtkSignalMarshaller marshaller,
		       GtkType             return_val,
		       guint               nparams,
		       ...);
</verb></tscreen>

Creates a new signal. The parameters are:

<itemize>
<item> <tt/name/: The name of the signal.
<item> <tt/run_type/: Whether the default handler runs before or after
user handlers. Usually this will be <tt/GTK_RUN_FIRST/, or <tt/GTK_RUN_LAST/,
although there are other possibilities.
<item> <tt/object_type/: The ID of the object that this signal applies
to. (It will also apply to that objects descendents)
<item> <tt/function_offset/: The offset within the class structure of
a pointer to the default handler.
<item> <tt/marshaller/: A function that is used to invoke the signal
handler. For signal handlers that have no arguments other than the
object that emitted the signal and user data, we can use the
pre-supplied marshaller function <tt/gtk_signal_default_marshaller/.
<item> <tt/return_val/: The type of the return val.
<item> <tt/nparams/: The number of parameters of the signal handler
(other than the two default ones mentioned above)
<item> <tt/.../: The types of the parameters.
</itemize>

When specifying types, the <tt/GtkType/ enumeration is used:

<tscreen><verb>
typedef enum
{
  GTK_TYPE_INVALID,
  GTK_TYPE_NONE,
  GTK_TYPE_CHAR,
  GTK_TYPE_BOOL,
  GTK_TYPE_INT,
  GTK_TYPE_UINT,
  GTK_TYPE_LONG,
  GTK_TYPE_ULONG,
  GTK_TYPE_FLOAT,
  GTK_TYPE_DOUBLE,
  GTK_TYPE_STRING,
  GTK_TYPE_ENUM,
  GTK_TYPE_FLAGS,
  GTK_TYPE_BOXED,
  GTK_TYPE_FOREIGN,
  GTK_TYPE_CALLBACK,
  GTK_TYPE_ARGS,

  GTK_TYPE_POINTER,

  /* it'd be great if the next two could be removed eventually */
  GTK_TYPE_SIGNAL,
  GTK_TYPE_C_CALLBACK,

  GTK_TYPE_OBJECT

} GtkFundamentalType;
</verb></tscreen>

<p>
<tt/gtk_signal_new()/ returns a unique integer identifier for the
signal, that we store in the <tt/tictactoe_signals/ array, which we
index using an enumeration. (Conventionally, the enumeration elements
are the signal name, uppercased, but here there would be a conflict
with the <tt/TICTACTOE()/ macro, so we called it <tt/TICTACTOE_SIGNAL/
instead.

After creating our signals, we need to tell GTK to associate our
signals with the Tictactoe class. We do that by calling
<tt/gtk_object_class_add_signals()/. We then set the pointer which
points to the default handler for the ``tictactoe'' signal to NULL,
indicating that there is no default action.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> The <tt/_init()/ function.

<p>

Each widget class also needs a function to initialize the object
structure. Usually, this function has the fairly limited role of
setting the fields of the structure to default values. For composite
widgets, however, this function also creates the component widgets.

<tscreen><verb>
static void
tictactoe_init (Tictactoe *ttt)
{
  GtkWidget *table;
  gint i,j;
  
  table = gtk_table_new (3, 3, TRUE);
  gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(ttt), table);
  gtk_widget_show (table);

  for (i=0;i<3; i++)
    for (j=0;j<3; j++)
      {
	ttt->buttons[i][j] = gtk_toggle_button_new ();
	gtk_table_attach_defaults (GTK_TABLE(table), ttt->buttons[i][j], 
				   i, i+1, j, j+1);
	gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (ttt->buttons[i][j]), "toggled",
			    GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (tictactoe_toggle), ttt);
	gtk_widget_set_usize (ttt->buttons[i][j], 20, 20);
	gtk_widget_show (ttt->buttons[i][j]);
      }
}
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> And the rest...

<p>

There is one more function that every widget (except for base widget
types like GtkBin that cannot be instantiated) needs to have - the
function that the user calls to create an object of that type. This is
conventionally called <tt/WIDGETNAME_new()/. In some
widgets, though not for the Tictactoe widgets, this function takes
arguments, and does some setup based on the arguments. The other two
functions are specific to the Tictactoe widget. 

<p>
<tt/tictactoe_clear()/ is a public function that resets all the
buttons in the widget to the up position. Note the use of
<tt/gtk_signal_handler_block_by_data()/ to keep our signal handler for
button toggles from being triggered unnecessarily.

<p>
<tt/tictactoe_toggle()/ is the signal handler that is invoked when the
user clicks on a button. It checks to see if there are any winning
combinations that involve the toggled button, and if so, emits
the "tictactoe" signal.

<tscreen><verb>  
GtkWidget*
tictactoe_new ()
{
  return GTK_WIDGET ( gtk_type_new (tictactoe_get_type ()));
}

void	       
tictactoe_clear (Tictactoe *ttt)
{
  int i,j;

  for (i=0;i<3;i++)
    for (j=0;j<3;j++)
      {
	gtk_signal_handler_block_by_data (GTK_OBJECT(ttt->buttons[i][j]), ttt);
	gtk_toggle_button_set_state (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON (ttt->buttons[i][j]),
				     FALSE);
	gtk_signal_handler_unblock_by_data (GTK_OBJECT(ttt->buttons[i][j]), ttt);
      }
}

static void
tictactoe_toggle (GtkWidget *widget, Tictactoe *ttt)
{
  int i,k;

  static int rwins[8][3] = { { 0, 0, 0 }, { 1, 1, 1 }, { 2, 2, 2 },
			     { 0, 1, 2 }, { 0, 1, 2 }, { 0, 1, 2 },
			     { 0, 1, 2 }, { 0, 1, 2 } };
  static int cwins[8][3] = { { 0, 1, 2 }, { 0, 1, 2 }, { 0, 1, 2 },
			     { 0, 0, 0 }, { 1, 1, 1 }, { 2, 2, 2 },
			     { 0, 1, 2 }, { 2, 1, 0 } };

  int success, found;

  for (k=0; k<8; k++)
    {
      success = TRUE;
      found = FALSE;

      for (i=0;i<3;i++)
	{
	  success = success &amp;&amp; 
	    GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(ttt->buttons[rwins[k][i]][cwins[k][i]])->active;
	  found = found ||
	    ttt->buttons[rwins[k][i]][cwins[k][i]] == widget;
	}
      
      if (success &amp;&amp; found)
	{
	  gtk_signal_emit (GTK_OBJECT (ttt), 
			   tictactoe_signals[TICTACTOE_SIGNAL]);
	  break;
	}
    }
}
</verb></tscreen>

<p>

And finally, an example program using our Tictactoe widget:

<tscreen><verb>
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
#include "tictactoe.h"

/* Invoked when a row, column or diagonal is completed */
void
win (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
  g_print ("Yay!\n");
  tictactoe_clear (TICTACTOE (widget));
}

int 
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
  GtkWidget *window;
  GtkWidget *ttt;
  
  gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);

  window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
  
  gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Aspect Frame");
  
  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
		      GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_exit), NULL);
  
  gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);

  /* Create a new Tictactoe widget */
  ttt = tictactoe_new ();
  gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), ttt);
  gtk_widget_show (ttt);

  /* And attach to its "tictactoe" signal */
  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (ttt), "tictactoe",
		      GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (win), NULL);

  gtk_widget_show (window);
  
  gtk_main ();
  
  return 0;
}

</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Creating a widget from scratch.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> Introduction

<p>

In this section, we'll learn more about how widgets display themselves
on the screen and interact with events. As an example of this, we'll
create an analog dial widget with a pointer that the user can drag to
set the value.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> Displaying a widget on the screen

<p>
There are several steps that are involved in displaying on the screen.
After the widget is created with a call to <tt/WIDGETNAME_new()/,
several more functions are needed:

<itemize>
<item> <tt/WIDGETNAME_realize()/ is responsible for creating an X
window for the widget if it has one.
<item> <tt/WIDGETNAME_map()/ is invoked after the user calls
<tt/gtk_widget_show()/. It is responsible for making sure the widget
is actually drawn on the screen (<em/mapped/). For a container class,
it must also make calls to <tt/map()/> functions of any child widgets.
<item> <tt/WIDGETNAME_draw()/ is invoked when <tt/gtk_widget_draw()/
is called for the widget or one of its ancestors. It makes the actual
calls to the drawing functions to draw the widget on the screen. For
container widgets, this function must make calls to
<tt/gtk_widget_draw()/ for its child widgets.
<item> <tt/WIDGETNAME_expose()/ is a handler for expose events for the
widget. It makes the necessary calls to the drawing functions to draw
the exposed portion on the screen. For container widgets, this
function must generate expose events for its child widgets which don't
have their own windows. (If they have their own windows, then X will
generate the necessary expose events)
</itemize>

<p>
You might notice that the last two functions are quite similar - each
is responsible for drawing the widget on the screen. In fact many
types of widgets don't really care about the difference between the
two. The default <tt/draw()/ function in the widget class simply
generates a synthetic expose event for the redrawn area. However, some
types of widgets can save work by distinguishing between the two
functions. For instance, if a widget has multiple X windows, then
since expose events identify the exposed window, it can redraw only
the affected window, which is not possible for calls to <tt/draw()/.

<p>
Container widgets, even if they don't care about the difference for
themselves, can't simply use the default <tt/draw()/ function because
their child widgets might care about the difference. However,
it would be wasteful to duplicate the drawing code between the two
functions. The convention is that such widgets have a function called
<tt/WIDGETNAME_paint()/ that does the actual work of drawing the
widget, that is then called by the <tt/draw()/ and <tt/expose()/
functions.

<p>
In our example approach, since the dial widget is not a container
widget, and only has a single window, we can take the simplest
approach and use the default <tt/draw()/ function and only implement
an <tt/expose()/ function.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> The origins of the Dial Widget

<p>
Just as all land animals are just variants on the first amphibian that
crawled up out of the mud, Gtk widgets tend to start off as variants
of some other, previously written widget.  Thus, although this section
is entilted ``Creating a Widget from Scratch'', the Dial widget really
began with the source code for the Range widget. This was picked as a
starting point because it would be nice if our Dial had the same
interface as the Scale widgets which are just specialized descendents
of the Range widget. So, though the source code is presented below in
finished form, it should not be implied that it was written, <em>deus
ex machina</em> in this fashion. Also, if you aren't yet familiar with
how scale widgets work from the application writer's point of view, it
would be a good idea to look them over before continuing.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> The Basics

<p>
Quite a bit of our widget should look pretty familiar from the
Tictactoe widget. First, we have a header file:

<tscreen><verb>
/* GTK - The GIMP Toolkit
 * Copyright (C) 1995-1997 Peter Mattis, Spencer Kimball and Josh MacDonald
 *
 * This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
 * modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
 * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
 * version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
 *
 * This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
 * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
 * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
 * Library General Public License for more details.
 *
 * You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
 * License along with this library; if not, write to the Free
 * Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
 */

#ifndef __GTK_DIAL_H__
#define __GTK_DIAL_H__

#include <gdk/gdk.h>
#include <gtk/gtkadjustment.h>
#include <gtk/gtkwidget.h>


#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif /* __cplusplus */


#define GTK_DIAL(obj)          GTK_CHECK_CAST (obj, gtk_dial_get_type (), GtkDial)
#define GTK_DIAL_CLASS(klass)  GTK_CHECK_CLASS_CAST (klass, gtk_dial_get_type (), GtkDialClass)
#define GTK_IS_DIAL(obj)       GTK_CHECK_TYPE (obj, gtk_dial_get_type ())


typedef struct _GtkDial        GtkDial;
typedef struct _GtkDialClass   GtkDialClass;

struct _GtkDial
{
  GtkWidget widget;

  /* update policy (GTK_UPDATE_[CONTINUOUS/DELAYED/DISCONTINUOUS]) */
  guint policy : 2;

  /* Button currently pressed or 0 if none */
  guint8 button;

  /* Dimensions of dial components */
  gint radius;
  gint pointer_width;

  /* ID of update timer, or 0 if none */
  guint32 timer;

  /* Current angle */
  gfloat angle;

  /* Old values from adjustment stored so we know when something changes */
  gfloat old_value;
  gfloat old_lower;
  gfloat old_upper;

  /* The adjustment object that stores the data for this dial */
  GtkAdjustment *adjustment;
};

struct _GtkDialClass
{
  GtkWidgetClass parent_class;
};


GtkWidget*     gtk_dial_new                    (GtkAdjustment *adjustment);
guint          gtk_dial_get_type               (void);
GtkAdjustment* gtk_dial_get_adjustment         (GtkDial      *dial);
void           gtk_dial_set_update_policy      (GtkDial      *dial,
						GtkUpdateType  policy);

void           gtk_dial_set_adjustment         (GtkDial      *dial,
						GtkAdjustment *adjustment);
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif /* __cplusplus */


#endif /* __GTK_DIAL_H__ */
</verb></tscreen>

Since there is quite a bit more going on in this widget, than the last
one, we have more fields in the data structure, but otherwise things
are pretty similar.

Next, after including header files, and declaring a few constants,
we have some functions to provide information about the widget
and initialize it:

<tscreen><verb>
#include <math.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <gtk/gtkmain.h>
#include <gtk/gtksignal.h>

#include "gtkdial.h"

#define SCROLL_DELAY_LENGTH  300
#define DIAL_DEFAULT_SIZE 100

/* Forward declararations */

[ omitted to save space ]

/* Local data */

static GtkWidgetClass *parent_class = NULL;

guint
gtk_dial_get_type ()
{
  static guint dial_type = 0;

  if (!dial_type)
    {
      GtkTypeInfo dial_info =
      {
	"GtkDial",
	sizeof (GtkDial),
	sizeof (GtkDialClass),
	(GtkClassInitFunc) gtk_dial_class_init,
	(GtkObjectInitFunc) gtk_dial_init,
	(GtkArgSetFunc) NULL,
        (GtkArgGetFunc) NULL,
      };

      dial_type = gtk_type_unique (gtk_widget_get_type (), &amp;dial_info);
    }

  return dial_type;
}

static void
gtk_dial_class_init (GtkDialClass *class)
{
  GtkObjectClass *object_class;
  GtkWidgetClass *widget_class;

  object_class = (GtkObjectClass*) class;
  widget_class = (GtkWidgetClass*) class;

  parent_class = gtk_type_class (gtk_widget_get_type ());

  object_class->destroy = gtk_dial_destroy;

  widget_class->realize = gtk_dial_realize;
  widget_class->expose_event = gtk_dial_expose;
  widget_class->size_request = gtk_dial_size_request;
  widget_class->size_allocate = gtk_dial_size_allocate;
  widget_class->button_press_event = gtk_dial_button_press;
  widget_class->button_release_event = gtk_dial_button_release;
  widget_class->motion_notify_event = gtk_dial_motion_notify;
}

static void
gtk_dial_init (GtkDial *dial)
{
  dial->button = 0;
  dial->policy = GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS;
  dial->timer = 0;
  dial->radius = 0;
  dial->pointer_width = 0;
  dial->angle = 0.0;
  dial->old_value = 0.0;
  dial->old_lower = 0.0;
  dial->old_upper = 0.0;
  dial->adjustment = NULL;
}

GtkWidget*
gtk_dial_new (GtkAdjustment *adjustment)
{
  GtkDial *dial;

  dial = gtk_type_new (gtk_dial_get_type ());

  if (!adjustment)
    adjustment = (GtkAdjustment*) gtk_adjustment_new (0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0);

  gtk_dial_set_adjustment (dial, adjustment);

  return GTK_WIDGET (dial);
}

static void
gtk_dial_destroy (GtkObject *object)
{
  GtkDial *dial;

  g_return_if_fail (object != NULL);
  g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (object));

  dial = GTK_DIAL (object);

  if (dial->adjustment)
    gtk_object_unref (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment));

  if (GTK_OBJECT_CLASS (parent_class)->destroy)
    (* GTK_OBJECT_CLASS (parent_class)->destroy) (object);
}
</verb></tscreen>

Note that this <tt/init()/ function does less than for the Tictactoe
widget, since this is not a composite widget, and the <tt/new()/
function does more, since it now has an argument. Also, note that when
we store a pointer to the Adjustment object, we increment its
reference count, (and correspondingly decrement when we no longer use
it) so that GTK can keep track of when it can be safely destroyed.

<p>
Also, there are a few function to manipulate the widget's options:

<tscreen><verb>
GtkAdjustment*
gtk_dial_get_adjustment (GtkDial *dial)
{
  g_return_val_if_fail (dial != NULL, NULL);
  g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial), NULL);

  return dial->adjustment;
}

void
gtk_dial_set_update_policy (GtkDial      *dial,
			     GtkUpdateType  policy)
{
  g_return_if_fail (dial != NULL);
  g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial));

  dial->policy = policy;
}

void
gtk_dial_set_adjustment (GtkDial      *dial,
			  GtkAdjustment *adjustment)
{
  g_return_if_fail (dial != NULL);
  g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial));

  if (dial->adjustment)
    {
      gtk_signal_disconnect_by_data (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment), (gpointer) dial);
      gtk_object_unref (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment));
    }

  dial->adjustment = adjustment;
  gtk_object_ref (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment));

  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (adjustment), "changed",
		      (GtkSignalFunc) gtk_dial_adjustment_changed,
		      (gpointer) dial);
  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (adjustment), "value_changed",
		      (GtkSignalFunc) gtk_dial_adjustment_value_changed,
		      (gpointer) dial);

  dial->old_value = adjustment->value;
  dial->old_lower = adjustment->lower;
  dial->old_upper = adjustment->upper;

  gtk_dial_update (dial);
}
</verb></tscreen>

<sect2> <tt/gtk_dial_realize()/

<p>
Now we come to some new types of functions. First, we have a function
that does the work of creating the X window. Notice that a mask is
passed to the function <tt/gdk_window_new()/ which specifies which fields of
the GdkWindowAttr structure actually have data in them (the remaining
fields wll be given default values). Also worth noting is the way the
event mask of the widget is created. We call
<tt/gtk_widget_get_events()/ to retrieve the event mask that the user
has specified for this widget (with <tt/gtk_widget_set_events()/, and
add the events that we are interested in ourselves.

<p>
After creating the window, we set its style and background, and put a
pointer to the widget in the user data field of the GdkWindow. This
last step allows GTK to dispatch events for this window to the correct
widget.

<tscreen><verb>
static void
gtk_dial_realize (GtkWidget *widget)
{
  GtkDial *dial;
  GdkWindowAttr attributes;
  gint attributes_mask;

  g_return_if_fail (widget != NULL);
  g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget));

  GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS (widget, GTK_REALIZED);
  dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);

  attributes.x = widget->allocation.x;
  attributes.y = widget->allocation.y;
  attributes.width = widget->allocation.width;
  attributes.height = widget->allocation.height;
  attributes.wclass = GDK_INPUT_OUTPUT;
  attributes.window_type = GDK_WINDOW_CHILD;
  attributes.event_mask = gtk_widget_get_events (widget) | 
    GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | 
    GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK |
    GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK;
  attributes.visual = gtk_widget_get_visual (widget);
  attributes.colormap = gtk_widget_get_colormap (widget);

  attributes_mask = GDK_WA_X | GDK_WA_Y | GDK_WA_VISUAL | GDK_WA_COLORMAP;
  widget->window = gdk_window_new (widget->parent->window, &amp;attributes, attributes_mask);

  widget->style = gtk_style_attach (widget->style, widget->window);

  gdk_window_set_user_data (widget->window, widget);

  gtk_style_set_background (widget->style, widget->window, GTK_STATE_ACTIVE);
}
</verb></tscreen>

<sect2> Size negotiation

<p>
Before the first time that the window containing a widget is
displayed, and whenever the layout of the window changes, GTK asks
each child widget for its desired size. This request is handled by the
function, <tt/gtk_dial_size_request()/. Since our widget isn't a
container widget, and has no real constraints on its size, we just
return a reasonable default value.

<tscreen><verb>
static void 
gtk_dial_size_request (GtkWidget      *widget,
		       GtkRequisition *requisition)
{
  requisition->width = DIAL_DEFAULT_SIZE;
  requisition->height = DIAL_DEFAULT_SIZE;
}
</verb></tscreen>

<p>
After all the widgets have requested an ideal size, the layout of the
window is computed and each child widget is notified of its actual
size. Usually, this will at least as large as the requested size, but
if for instance, the user has resized the window, it may occasionally
be smaller than the requested size. The size notification is handled
by the function <tt/gtk_dial_size_allocate()/. Notice that as well as
computing the sizes of some component pieces for future use, this
routine also does the grunt work of moving the widgets X window into
the new position and size.

<tscreen><verb>
static void
gtk_dial_size_allocate (GtkWidget     *widget,
			GtkAllocation *allocation)
{
  GtkDial *dial;

  g_return_if_fail (widget != NULL);
  g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget));
  g_return_if_fail (allocation != NULL);

  widget->allocation = *allocation;
  if (GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED (widget))
    {
      dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);

      gdk_window_move_resize (widget->window,
			      allocation->x, allocation->y,
			      allocation->width, allocation->height);

      dial->radius = MAX(allocation->width,allocation->height) * 0.45;
      dial->pointer_width = dial->radius / 5;
    }
}
</verb></tscreen>.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> <tt/gtk_dial_expose()/

<p>
As mentioned above, all the drawing of this widget is done in the
handler for expose events. There's not much to remark on here except
the use of the function <tt/gtk_draw_polygon/ to draw the pointer with
three dimensional shading according to the colors stored in the
widget's style.

<tscreen><verb>
static gint
gtk_dial_expose (GtkWidget      *widget,
		 GdkEventExpose *event)
{
  GtkDial *dial;
  GdkPoint points[3];
  gdouble s,c;
  gdouble theta;
  gint xc, yc;
  gint tick_length;
  gint i;

  g_return_val_if_fail (widget != NULL, FALSE);
  g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget), FALSE);
  g_return_val_if_fail (event != NULL, FALSE);

  if (event->count > 0)
    return FALSE;
  
  dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);

  gdk_window_clear_area (widget->window,
			 0, 0,
			 widget->allocation.width,
			 widget->allocation.height);

  xc = widget->allocation.width/2;
  yc = widget->allocation.height/2;

  /* Draw ticks */

  for (i=0; i<25; i++)
    {
      theta = (i*M_PI/18. - M_PI/6.);
      s = sin(theta);
      c = cos(theta);

      tick_length = (i%6 == 0) ? dial->pointer_width : dial->pointer_width/2;
      
      gdk_draw_line (widget->window,
		     widget->style->fg_gc[widget->state],
		     xc + c*(dial->radius - tick_length),
		     yc - s*(dial->radius - tick_length),
		     xc + c*dial->radius,
		     yc - s*dial->radius);
    }

  /* Draw pointer */

  s = sin(dial->angle);
  c = cos(dial->angle);


  points[0].x = xc + s*dial->pointer_width/2;
  points[0].y = yc + c*dial->pointer_width/2;
  points[1].x = xc + c*dial->radius;
  points[1].y = yc - s*dial->radius;
  points[2].x = xc - s*dial->pointer_width/2;
  points[2].y = yc - c*dial->pointer_width/2;

  gtk_draw_polygon (widget->style,
		    widget->window,
		    GTK_STATE_NORMAL,
		    GTK_SHADOW_OUT,
		    points, 3,
		    TRUE);
  
  return FALSE;
}
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> Event handling

<p>

The rest of the widget's code handles various types of events, and
isn't too different from what would be found in many GTK
applications. Two types of events can occur - either the user can
click on the widget with the mouse and drag to move the pointer, or
the value of the Adjustment object can change due to some external
circumstance. 

<p>
When the user clicks on the widget, we check to see if the click was
appropriately near the pointer, and if so, store then button that the
user clicked with in the <tt/button/ field of the widget
structure, and grab all mouse events with a call to
<tt/gtk_grab_add()/. Subsequent motion of the mouse causes the
value of the control to be recomputed (by the function
<tt/gtk_dial_update_mouse/). Depending on the policy that has been
set, "value_changed" events are either generated instantly
(<tt/GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS/), after a delay in a timer added with
<tt/gtk_timeout_add()/ (<tt/GTK_UPDATE_DELAYED/), or only when the
button is released (<tt/GTK_UPDATE_DISCONTINUOUS/).

<tscreen><verb>
static gint
gtk_dial_button_press (GtkWidget      *widget,
		       GdkEventButton *event)
{
  GtkDial *dial;
  gint dx, dy;
  double s, c;
  double d_parallel;
  double d_perpendicular;

  g_return_val_if_fail (widget != NULL, FALSE);
  g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget), FALSE);
  g_return_val_if_fail (event != NULL, FALSE);

  dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);

  /* Determine if button press was within pointer region - we 
     do this by computing the parallel and perpendicular distance of
     the point where the mouse was pressed from the line passing through
     the pointer */
  
  dx = event->x - widget->allocation.width / 2;
  dy = widget->allocation.height / 2 - event->y;
  
  s = sin(dial->angle);
  c = cos(dial->angle);
  
  d_parallel = s*dy + c*dx;
  d_perpendicular = fabs(s*dx - c*dy);
  
  if (!dial->button &&
      (d_perpendicular < dial->pointer_width/2) &&
      (d_parallel > - dial->pointer_width))
    {
      gtk_grab_add (widget);

      dial->button = event->button;

      gtk_dial_update_mouse (dial, event->x, event->y);
    }

  return FALSE;
}

static gint
gtk_dial_button_release (GtkWidget      *widget,
			  GdkEventButton *event)
{
  GtkDial *dial;

  g_return_val_if_fail (widget != NULL, FALSE);
  g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget), FALSE);
  g_return_val_if_fail (event != NULL, FALSE);

  dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);

  if (dial->button == event->button)
    {
      gtk_grab_remove (widget);

      dial->button = 0;

      if (dial->policy == GTK_UPDATE_DELAYED)
	gtk_timeout_remove (dial->timer);
      
      if ((dial->policy != GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS) &&
	  (dial->old_value != dial->adjustment->value))
	gtk_signal_emit_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment), "value_changed");
    }

  return FALSE;
}

static gint
gtk_dial_motion_notify (GtkWidget      *widget,
			 GdkEventMotion *event)
{
  GtkDial *dial;
  GdkModifierType mods;
  gint x, y, mask;

  g_return_val_if_fail (widget != NULL, FALSE);
  g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget), FALSE);
  g_return_val_if_fail (event != NULL, FALSE);

  dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);

  if (dial->button != 0)
    {
      x = event->x;
      y = event->y;

      if (event->is_hint || (event->window != widget->window))
	gdk_window_get_pointer (widget->window, &amp;x, &amp;y, &amp;mods);

      switch (dial->button)
	{
	case 1:
	  mask = GDK_BUTTON1_MASK;
	  break;
	case 2:
	  mask = GDK_BUTTON2_MASK;
	  break;
	case 3:
	  mask = GDK_BUTTON3_MASK;
	  break;
	default:
	  mask = 0;
	  break;
	}

      if (mods & mask)
	gtk_dial_update_mouse (dial, x,y);
    }

  return FALSE;
}

static gint
gtk_dial_timer (GtkDial *dial)
{
  g_return_val_if_fail (dial != NULL, FALSE);
  g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial), FALSE);

  if (dial->policy == GTK_UPDATE_DELAYED)
    gtk_signal_emit_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment), "value_changed");

  return FALSE;
}

static void
gtk_dial_update_mouse (GtkDial *dial, gint x, gint y)
{
  gint xc, yc;
  gfloat old_value;

  g_return_if_fail (dial != NULL);
  g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial));

  xc = GTK_WIDGET(dial)->allocation.width / 2;
  yc = GTK_WIDGET(dial)->allocation.height / 2;

  old_value = dial->adjustment->value;
  dial->angle = atan2(yc-y, x-xc);

  if (dial->angle < -M_PI/2.)
    dial->angle += 2*M_PI;

  if (dial->angle < -M_PI/6)
    dial->angle = -M_PI/6;

  if (dial->angle > 7.*M_PI/6.)
    dial->angle = 7.*M_PI/6.;

  dial->adjustment->value = dial->adjustment->lower + (7.*M_PI/6 - dial->angle) *
    (dial->adjustment->upper - dial->adjustment->lower) / (4.*M_PI/3.);

  if (dial->adjustment->value != old_value)
    {
      if (dial->policy == GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS)
	{
	  gtk_signal_emit_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment), "value_changed");
	}
      else
	{
	  gtk_widget_draw (GTK_WIDGET(dial), NULL);

	  if (dial->policy == GTK_UPDATE_DELAYED)
	    {
	      if (dial->timer)
		gtk_timeout_remove (dial->timer);

	      dial->timer = gtk_timeout_add (SCROLL_DELAY_LENGTH,
					     (GtkFunction) gtk_dial_timer,
					     (gpointer) dial);
	    }
	}
    }
}
</verb></tscreen>

<p>
Changes to the Adjustment by external means are communicated to our
widget by the ``changed'' and ``value_changed'' signals. The handlers
for these functions call <tt/gtk_dial_update()/ to validate the
arguments, compute the new pointer angle, and redraw the widget (by
calling <tt/gtk_widget_draw()/).

<tscreen><verb>
static void
gtk_dial_update (GtkDial *dial)
{
  gfloat new_value;
  
  g_return_if_fail (dial != NULL);
  g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial));

  new_value = dial->adjustment->value;
  
  if (new_value < dial->adjustment->lower)
    new_value = dial->adjustment->lower;

  if (new_value > dial->adjustment->upper)
    new_value = dial->adjustment->upper;

  if (new_value != dial->adjustment->value)
    {
      dial->adjustment->value = new_value;
      gtk_signal_emit_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment), "value_changed");
    }

  dial->angle = 7.*M_PI/6. - (new_value - dial->adjustment->lower) * 4.*M_PI/3. /
    (dial->adjustment->upper - dial->adjustment->lower);

  gtk_widget_draw (GTK_WIDGET(dial), NULL);
}

static void
gtk_dial_adjustment_changed (GtkAdjustment *adjustment,
			      gpointer       data)
{
  GtkDial *dial;

  g_return_if_fail (adjustment != NULL);
  g_return_if_fail (data != NULL);

  dial = GTK_DIAL (data);

  if ((dial->old_value != adjustment->value) ||
      (dial->old_lower != adjustment->lower) ||
      (dial->old_upper != adjustment->upper))
    {
      gtk_dial_update (dial);

      dial->old_value = adjustment->value;
      dial->old_lower = adjustment->lower;
      dial->old_upper = adjustment->upper;
    }
}

static void
gtk_dial_adjustment_value_changed (GtkAdjustment *adjustment,
				    gpointer       data)
{
  GtkDial *dial;

  g_return_if_fail (adjustment != NULL);
  g_return_if_fail (data != NULL);

  dial = GTK_DIAL (data);

  if (dial->old_value != adjustment->value)
    {
      gtk_dial_update (dial);

      dial->old_value = adjustment->value;
    }
}
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> Possible Enhancements
<p>

The Dial widget as we've described it so far runs about 670 lines of
code. Although that might sound like a fair bit, we've really
accomplished quite a bit with that much code, especially since much of
that length is headers and boilerplate. However, there are quite a few
more enhancements that could be made to this widget:

<itemize>
<item> If you try this widget out, you'll find that there is some
flashing as the pointer is dragged around. This is because the entire
widget is erased every time the pointer is moved before being
redrawn. Often, the best way to handle this problem is to draw to an
offscreen pixmap, then copy the final results onto the screen in one
step. (The ProgressBar widget draws itself in this fashion.)

<item> The user should be able to use the up and down arrow keys to
increase and decrease the value.

<item> It would be nice if the widget had buttons to increase and
decrease the value in small or large steps. Although it would be
possible to use embedded Button widgets for this, we would also like
the buttons to auto-repeat when held down, as the arrows on a
scrollbar do. Most of the code to implement this type of behavior can
be found in the GtkRange widget.

<item> The Dial widget could be made into a container widget with a
single child widget positioned at the bottom between the buttons
mentioned above. The user could then add their choice of a label or
entry widget to display the current value of the dial.

</itemize>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Learning More

<p>
Only a small part of the many details involved in creating widgets
could be described above. If you want to write your own widgets, the
best source of examples is the GTK source itself. Ask yourself some
questions about the widget you want to write: is it a Container
widget? does it have its own window? is it a modification of an
existing widget? Then find a similar widget, and start making changes.
Good luck!

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Scribble, A Simple Example Drawing Program
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Overview

<p>
In this section, we will build a simple drawing program. In the
process, we will examine how to handle mouse events, how to draw in a
window, and how to do drawing better by using a backing pixmap. After
creating the simple drawing program, we will extend it by adding
support for XInput devices, such as drawing tablets. GTK provides
support routines which makes getting extended information, such as
pressure and tilt, from such devices quite easy.

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Event Handling

<p>
The GTK signals we have already discussed are for high-level actions,
such as a menu item being selected. However, sometimes it is useful to
learn about lower-level occurrences, such as the mouse being moved, or
a key being pressed. There are also GTK signals corresponding to these
low-level <em>events</em>. The handlers for these signals have an
extra parameter which is a pointer to a structure containing
information about the event. For instance, motion events handlers are
passed a pointer to a GdkEventMotion structure which looks (in part)
like:

<tscreen><verb>
struct _GdkEventMotion
{
  GdkEventType type;
  GdkWindow *window;
  guint32 time;
  gdouble x;
  gdouble y;
  ...
  guint state;
  ...
};
</verb></tscreen>

<tt/type/ will be set to the event type, in this case
<tt/GDK_MOTION_NOTIFY/, window is the window in which the event
occured. <tt/x/ and <tt/y/ give the coordinates of the event,
and <tt/state/ specifies the modifier state when the event
occurred (that is, it specifies which modifier keys and mouse buttons
were pressed.) It is the bitwise OR of some of the following:

<tscreen><verb>
GDK_SHIFT_MASK  
GDK_LOCK_MASK   
GDK_CONTROL_MASK
GDK_MOD1_MASK   
GDK_MOD2_MASK   
GDK_MOD3_MASK   
GDK_MOD4_MASK   
GDK_MOD5_MASK   
GDK_BUTTON1_MASK
GDK_BUTTON2_MASK
GDK_BUTTON3_MASK
GDK_BUTTON4_MASK
GDK_BUTTON5_MASK
</verb></tscreen>

<p>
As for other signals, to determine what happens when an event occurs
we call <tt>gtk_signal_connect()</tt>. But we also need let GTK
know which events we want to be notified about. To do this, we call
the function:

<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_widget_set_events (GtkWidget *widget,
                            gint      events);
</verb></tscreen>

The second field specifies the events we are interested in. It
is the bitwise OR of constants that specify different types
of events. For future reference the event types are:

<tscreen><verb>
GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK
GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK
GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK
GDK_BUTTON_MOTION_MASK     
GDK_BUTTON1_MOTION_MASK    
GDK_BUTTON2_MOTION_MASK    
GDK_BUTTON3_MOTION_MASK    
GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK      
GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK    
GDK_KEY_PRESS_MASK         
GDK_KEY_RELEASE_MASK       
GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY_MASK      
GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK      
GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE_MASK      
GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK         
GDK_PROPERTY_CHANGE_MASK   
GDK_PROXIMITY_IN_MASK      
GDK_PROXIMITY_OUT_MASK     
</verb></tscreen>

There are a few subtle points that have to be observed when calling
<tt/gtk_widget_set_events()/. First, it must be called before the X window
for a GTK widget is created. In practical terms, this means you
should call it immediately after creating the widget. Second, the
widget must have an associated X window. For efficiency, many widget
types do not have their own window, but draw in their parent's window.
These widgets are:

<tscreen><verb>
GtkAlignment
GtkArrow
GtkBin
GtkBox
GtkImage
GtkItem
GtkLabel
GtkPixmap
GtkScrolledWindow
GtkSeparator
GtkTable
GtkAspectFrame
GtkFrame
GtkVBox
GtkHBox
GtkVSeparator
GtkHSeparator
</verb></tscreen>

To capture events for these widgets, you need to use an EventBox 
widget. See the section on   
<ref id="sec_The_EventBox_Widget" name="The EventBox Widget"> for
details.

<p>
For our drawing program, we want to know when the mouse button is
pressed and when the mouse is moved, so we specify
<tt/GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK/ and <tt/GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK/. We also
want to know when we need to redraw our window, so we specify
<tt/GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK/. Although we want to be notified via a
Configure event when our window size changes, we don't have to specify
the corresponding <tt/GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK/ flag, because it is
automatically specified for all windows.

<p>
It turns out, however, that there is a problem with just specifying
<tt/GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK/. This will cause the server to add a new
motion event to the event queue every time the user moves the mouse.
Imagine that it takes us 0.1 seconds to handle a motion event, but the
X server queues a new motion event every 0.05 seconds. We will soon
get way behind the users drawing. If the user draws for 5 seconds,
it will take us another 5 seconds to catch up after they release 
the mouse button! What we would like is to only get one motion
event for each event we process. The way to do this is to 
specify <tt/GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK/. 

<p>
When we specify <tt/GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK/, the server sends
us a motion event the first time the pointer moves after entering
our window, or after a button press or release event. Subsequent 
motion events will be suppressed until we explicitely ask for
the position of the pointer using the function:

<tscreen><verb>
GdkWindow*    gdk_window_get_pointer     (GdkWindow       *window,
					  gint            *x,
					  gint            *y,
					  GdkModifierType *mask);
</verb></tscreen>

(There is another function, <tt>gtk_widget_get_pointer()</tt> which
has a simpler interface, but turns out not to be very useful, since
it only retrieves the position of the mouse, not whether the buttons
are pressed.)

<p>
The code to set the events for our window then looks like:

<tscreen><verb>
  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (drawing_area), "expose_event",
		      (GtkSignalFunc) expose_event, NULL);
  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(drawing_area),"configure_event",
		      (GtkSignalFunc) configure_event, NULL);
  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (drawing_area), "motion_notify_event",
		      (GtkSignalFunc) motion_notify_event, NULL);
  gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (drawing_area), "button_press_event",
		      (GtkSignalFunc) button_press_event, NULL);

  gtk_widget_set_events (drawing_area, GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK
			 | GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK
			 | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK
			 | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK
			 | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK);
</verb></tscreen>

We'll save the "expose_event" and "configure_event" handlers for
later. The "motion_notify_event" and "button_press_event" handlers
pretty simple:

<tscreen><verb>
static gint
button_press_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventButton *event)
{
  if (event->button == 1 &amp;&amp; pixmap != NULL)
      draw_brush (widget, event->x, event->y);

  return TRUE;
}

static gint
motion_notify_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventMotion *event)
{
  int x, y;
  GdkModifierType state;

  if (event->is_hint)
    gdk_window_get_pointer (event->window, &amp;x, &amp;y, &amp;state);
  else
    {
      x = event->x;
      y = event->y;
      state = event->state;
    }
    
  if (state &amp; GDK_BUTTON1_MASK &amp;&amp; pixmap != NULL)
    draw_brush (widget, x, y);
  
  return TRUE;
}
</verb></tscreen>

<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> The DrawingArea Widget, And Drawing

<p>
We know turn to the process of drawing on the screen. The 
widget we use for this is the DrawingArea widget. A drawing area
widget is essentially an X window and nothing more. It is a blank
canvas in which we can draw whatever we like. A drawing area
is created using the call:

<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_drawing_area_new        (void);
</verb></tscreen>

A default size for the widget can be specified by calling:

<tscreen><verb>
void       gtk_drawing_area_size       (GtkDrawingArea      *darea,
					gint                 width,
					gint                 height);
</verb></tscreen>

This default size can be overriden, as is true for all widgets,
by calling <tt>gtk_widget_set_usize()</tt>, and that, in turn, can
be overridden if the user manually resizes the the window containing
the drawing area.

<p>
It should be noted that when we create a DrawingArea widget, we are,
<em>completely</em> responsible for drawing the contents. If our
window is obscured then uncovered, we get an exposure event and must
redraw what was previously hidden.

<p>
Having to remember everything that was drawn on the screen so we
can properly redraw it can, to say the least, be a nuisance. In
addition, it can be visually distracting if portions of the
window are cleared, then redrawn step by step. The solution to
this problem is to use an offscreen <em>backing pixmap</em>.
Instead of drawing directly to the screen, we draw to an image
stored in server memory but not displayed, then when the image
changes or new portions of the image are displayed, we copy the
relevant portions onto the screen.

<p>
To create an offscreen pixmap, we call the function:

<tscreen><verb>
GdkPixmap* gdk_pixmap_new               (GdkWindow  *window,
					 gint        width,
					 gint        height,
					 gint        depth);
</verb></tscreen>

The <tt>window</tt> parameter specifies a GDK window that this pixmap
takes some of its properties from. <tt>width</tt> and <tt>height</tt>
specify the size of the pixmap. <tt>depth</tt> specifies the <em>color
depth</em>, that is the number of bits per pixel, for the new window.
If the depth is specified as <tt>-1</tt>, it will match the depth
of <tt>window</tt>.

<p>
We create the pixmap in our "configure_event" handler. This event
is generated whenever the window changes size, including when it
is originally created.

<tscreen><verb>
/* Backing pixmap for drawing area */
static GdkPixmap *pixmap = NULL;

/* Create a new backing pixmap of the appropriate size */
static gint
configure_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventConfigure *event)
{
  if (pixmap)
    {
      gdk_pixmap_destroy(pixmap);
    }
  pixmap = gdk_pixmap_new(widget->window,
			  widget->allocation.width,
			  widget->allocation.height,
			  -1);
  gdk_draw_rectangle (pixmap,
		      widget->style->white_gc,
		      TRUE,
		      0, 0,
		      widget->allocation.width,
		      widget->allocation.height);

  return TRUE;
}
</verb></tscreen>

The call to <tt>gdk_draw_rectangle()</tt> clears the pixmap
initially to white. We'll say more about that in a moment.

<p>
Our exposure event handler then simply copies the relevant portion
of the pixmap onto the screen (we determine the area we need
to redraw by using the event->area field of the exposure event):

<tscreen><verb>
/* Refill the screen from the backing pixmap */
static gint
expose_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventExpose *event)
{
  gdk_draw_pixmap(widget->window,
		  widget->style->fg_gc[GTK_WIDGET_STATE (widget)],
		  pixmap,
		  event->area.x, event->area.y,
		  event->area.x, event->area.y,
		  event->area.width, event->area.height);

  return FALSE;
}
</verb></tscreen>

We've now seen how to keep the screen up to date with our pixmap, but
how do we actually draw interesting stuff on our pixmap?  There are a
large number of calls in GTK's GDK library for drawing on
<em>drawables</em>. A drawable is simply something that can be drawn
upon. It can be a window, a pixmap, or a bitmap (a black and white
image).  We've already seen two such calls above,
<tt>gdk_draw_rectangle()</tt> and <tt>gdk_draw_pixmap()</tt>. The
complete list is:

<tscreen><verb>
gdk_draw_line ()
gdk_draw_rectangle ()
gdk_draw_arc ()
gdk_draw_polygon ()
gdk_draw_string ()
gdk_draw_text ()
gdk_draw_pixmap ()
gdk_draw_bitmap ()
gdk_draw_image ()
gdk_draw_points ()
gdk_draw_segments ()
</verb></tscreen>

See the reference documentation or the header file
<tt>&lt;gdk/gdk.h&gt;</tt> for further details on these functions.
These functions all share the same first two arguments. The first
argument is the drawable to draw upon, the second argument is a
<em>graphics context</em> (GC). 

<p>
A graphics context encapsulates information about things such as
foreground and background color and line width. GDK has a full set of
functions for creating and modifying graphics contexts, but to keep
things simple we'll just use predefined graphics contexts. Each widget
has an associated style. (Which can be modified in a gtkrc file, see
the section GTK's rc file.) This, among other things, stores a number
of graphics contexts. Some examples of accessing these graphics
contexts are:

<tscreen><verb>
widget->style->white_gc
widget->style->black_gc
widget->style->fg_gc[GTK_STATE_NORMAL]
widget->style->bg_gc[GTK_WIDGET_STATE(widget)]
</verb></tscreen>

The fields <tt>fg_gc</tt>, <tt>bg_gc</tt>, <tt>dark_gc</tt>, and
<tt>light_gc</tt> are indexed by a parameter of type
<tt>GtkStateType</tt> which can take on the values:

<tscreen><verb>
GTK_STATE_NORMAL,
GTK_STATE_ACTIVE,
GTK_STATE_PRELIGHT,
GTK_STATE_SELECTED,
GTK_STATE_INSENSITIVE
</verb></tscreen>

For instance, the for <tt/GTK_STATE_SELECTED/ the default foreground
color is white and the default background color, dark blue.

<p>
Our function <tt>draw_brush()</tt>, which does the actual drawing
on the screen, is then:

<tscreen><verb>
/* Draw a rectangle on the screen */
static void
draw_brush (GtkWidget *widget, gdouble x, gdouble y)
{
  GdkRectangle update_rect;

  update_rect.x = x - 5;
  update_rect.y = y - 5;
  update_rect.width = 10;
  update_rect.height = 10;
  gdk_draw_rectangle (pixmap,
		      widget->style->black_gc,
		      TRUE,
		      update_rect.x, update_rect.y,
		      update_rect.width, update_rect.height);
  gtk_widget_draw (widget, &amp;update_rect);
}
</verb></tscreen>

After we draw the rectangle representing the brush onto the pixmap,
we call the function:

<tscreen><verb>
void       gtk_widget_draw                (GtkWidget           *widget,
					   GdkRectangle        *area);
</verb></tscreen>

which notifies X that the area given by the <tt>area</tt> parameter
needs to be updated. X will eventually generate an expose event
(possibly combining the areas passed in several calls to
<tt>gtk_widget_draw()</tt>) which will cause our expose event handler
to copy the relevant portions to the screen.

<p>
We have now covered the entire drawing program except for a few
mundane details like creating the main window. The complete
source code is available from the location from which you got
this tutorial, or from:

<htmlurl url="http://www.msc.cornell.edu/~otaylor/gtk-gimp/tutorial"
name="http://www.msc.cornell.edu/~otaylor/gtk-gimp/tutorial">


<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Adding XInput support

<p>

It is now possible to buy quite inexpensive input devices such 
as drawing tablets, which allow drawing with a much greater
ease of artistic expression than does a mouse. The simplest way
to use such devices is simply as a replacement for the mouse,
but that misses out many of the advantages of these devices,
such as:

<itemize>
<item> Pressure sensitivity
<item> Tilt reporting
<item> Sub-pixel positioning
<item> Multiple inputs (for example, a stylus with a point and eraser)
</itemize>

For information about the XInput extension, see the <htmlurl
url="http://www.msc.cornell.edu/~otaylor/xinput/XInput-HOWTO.html"
name="XInput-HOWTO">.

<p>
If we examine the full definition of, for example, the GdkEventMotion
structure, we see that it has fields to support extended device
information.

<tscreen><verb>
struct _GdkEventMotion
{
  GdkEventType type;
  GdkWindow *window;
  guint32 time;
  gdouble x;
  gdouble y;
  gdouble pressure;
  gdouble xtilt;
  gdouble ytilt;
  guint state;
  gint16 is_hint;
  GdkInputSource source;
  guint32 deviceid;
};
</verb></tscreen>

<tt/pressure/ gives the pressure as a floating point number between
0 and 1. <tt/xtilt/ and <tt/ytilt/ can take on values between 
-1 and 1, corresponding to the degree of tilt in each direction.
<tt/source/ and <tt/deviceid/ specify the device for which the
event occurred in two different ways. <tt/source/ gives some simple
information about the type of device. It can take the enumeration
values.

<tscreen><verb>
GDK_SOURCE_MOUSE
GDK_SOURCE_PEN
GDK_SOURCE_ERASER
GDK_SOURCE_CURSOR
</verb></tscreen>

<tt/deviceid/ specifies a unique numeric ID for the device. This can
be used to find out further information about the device using the
<tt/gdk_input_list_devices()/ call (see below). The special value
<tt/GDK_CORE_POINTER/ is used for the core pointer device. (Usually
the mouse.)

<sect2> Enabling extended device information

<p>
To let GTK know about our interest in the extended device information,
we merely have to add a single line to our program:

<tscreen><verb>
gtk_widget_set_extension_events (drawing_area, GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_CURSOR);
</verb></tscreen>

By giving the value <tt/GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_CURSOR/ we say that
we are interested in extension events, but only if we don't have
to draw our own cursor. See the section <ref
id="sec_Further_Sophistications" name="Further Sophistications"> below
for more information about drawing the cursor. We could also 
give the values <tt/GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_ALL/ if we were willing 
to draw our own cursor, or <tt/GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_NONE/ to revert
back to the default condition.

<p>
This is not completely the end of the story however. By default,
no extension devices are enabled. We need a mechanism to allow
users to enable and configure their extension devices. GTK provides
the InputDialog widget to automate this process. The following
procedure manages an InputDialog widget. It creates the dialog if
it isn't present, and raises it to the top otherwise.

<tscreen><verb>
void
input_dialog_destroy (GtkWidget *w, gpointer data)
{
  *((GtkWidget **)data) = NULL;
}

void
create_input_dialog ()
{
  static GtkWidget *inputd = NULL;

  if (!inputd)
    {
      inputd = gtk_input_dialog_new();

      gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(inputd), "destroy",
			  (GtkSignalFunc)input_dialog_destroy, &amp;inputd);
      gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT(GTK_INPUT_DIALOG(inputd)->close_button),
				 "clicked",
				 (GtkSignalFunc)gtk_widget_hide,
				 GTK_OBJECT(inputd));
      gtk_widget_hide ( GTK_INPUT_DIALOG(inputd)->save_button);

      gtk_widget_show (inputd);
    }
  else
    {
      if (!GTK_WIDGET_MAPPED(inputd))
	gtk_widget_show(inputd);
      else
	gdk_window_raise(inputd->window);
    }
}
</verb></tscreen>

(You might want to take note of the way we handle this dialog.  By
connecting to the "destroy" signal, we make sure that we don't keep a
pointer to dialog around after it is destroyed - that could lead to a
segfault.)

<p>
The InputDialog has two buttons "Close" and "Save", which by default
have no actions assigned to them. In the above function we make
"Close" hide the dialog, hide the "Save" button, since we don't
implement saving of XInput options in this program.

<sect2> Using extended device information

<p>
Once we've enabled the device, we can just use the extended 
device information in the extra fields of the event structures.
In fact, it is always safe to use this information since these
fields will have reasonable default values even when extended
events are not enabled.

<p>
Once change we do have to make is to call
<tt/gdk_input_window_get_pointer()/ instead of
<tt/gdk_window_get_pointer/. This is necessary because
<tt/gdk_window_get_pointer/ doesn't return the extended device
information.

<tscreen><verb>
void gdk_input_window_get_pointer     (GdkWindow       *window,
				       guint32         deviceid,
				       gdouble         *x,
				       gdouble         *y,
				       gdouble         *pressure,
				       gdouble         *xtilt,
				       gdouble         *ytilt,
				       GdkModifierType *mask);
</verb></tscreen>

When calling this function, we need to specify the device ID as
well as the window. Usually, we'll get the device ID from the
<tt/deviceid/ field of an event structure. Again, this function
will return reasonable values when extension events are not
enabled. (In this case, <tt/event->deviceid/ will have the value
<tt/GDK_CORE_POINTER/).

So the basic structure of our button-press and motion event handlers,
doesn't change much - we just need to add code to deal with the
extended information.

<tscreen><verb>
static gint
button_press_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventButton *event)
{
  print_button_press (event->deviceid);
  
  if (event->button == 1 &amp;&amp; pixmap != NULL)
    draw_brush (widget, event->source, event->x, event->y, event->pressure);

  return TRUE;
}

static gint
motion_notify_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventMotion *event)
{
  gdouble x, y;
  gdouble pressure;
  GdkModifierType state;

  if (event->is_hint)
    gdk_input_window_get_pointer (event->window, event->deviceid,
				  &amp;x, &amp;y, &amp;pressure, NULL, NULL, &amp;state);
  else
    {
      x = event->x;
      y = event->y;
      pressure = event->pressure;
      state = event->state;
    }
    
  if (state &amp; GDK_BUTTON1_MASK &amp;&amp; pixmap != NULL)
    draw_brush (widget, event->source, x, y, pressure);
  
  return TRUE;
}
</verb></tscreen>

We also need to do something with the new information. Our new
<tt/draw_brush()/ function draws with a different color for
each <tt/event->source/ and changes the brush size depending
on the pressure.

<tscreen><verb>
/* Draw a rectangle on the screen, size depending on pressure,
   and color on the type of device */
static void
draw_brush (GtkWidget *widget, GdkInputSource source,
	    gdouble x, gdouble y, gdouble pressure)
{
  GdkGC *gc;
  GdkRectangle update_rect;

  switch (source)
    {
    case GDK_SOURCE_MOUSE:
      gc = widget->style->dark_gc[GTK_WIDGET_STATE (widget)];
      break;
    case GDK_SOURCE_PEN:
      gc = widget->style->black_gc;
      break;
    case GDK_SOURCE_ERASER:
      gc = widget->style->white_gc;
      break;
    default:
      gc = widget->style->light_gc[GTK_WIDGET_STATE (widget)];
    }

  update_rect.x = x - 10 * pressure;
  update_rect.y = y - 10 * pressure;
  update_rect.width = 20 * pressure;
  update_rect.height = 20 * pressure;
  gdk_draw_rectangle (pixmap, gc, TRUE,
		      update_rect.x, update_rect.y,
		      update_rect.width, update_rect.height);
  gtk_widget_draw (widget, &amp;update_rect);
}
</verb></tscreen>

<sect2> Finding out more about a device

<p>
As an example of how to find out more about a device, our program
will print the name of the device that generates each button
press. To find out the name of a device, we call the function:

<tscreen><verb>
GList *gdk_input_list_devices               (void);
</verb></tscreen>

which returns a GList (a linked list type from the glib library)
of GdkDeviceInfo structures. The GdkDeviceInfo strucure is defined
as:

<tscreen><verb>
struct _GdkDeviceInfo
{
  guint32 deviceid;
  gchar *name;
  GdkInputSource source;
  GdkInputMode mode;
  gint has_cursor;
  gint num_axes;
  GdkAxisUse *axes;
  gint num_keys;
  GdkDeviceKey *keys;
};
</verb></tscreen>

Most of these fields are configuration information that you
can ignore unless you are implemented XInput configuration
saving. The we are interested in here is <tt/name/ which is
simply the name that X assigns to the device. The other field
that isn't configuration information is <tt/has_cursor/. If
<tt/has_cursor/ is false, then we we need to draw our own
cursor. But since we've specified <tt/GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_CURSOR/,
we don't have to worry about this.

<p>
Our <tt/print_button_press()/ function simply iterates through
the returned list until it finds a match, then prints out
the name of the device.

<tscreen><verb>
static void
print_button_press (guint32 deviceid)
{
  GList *tmp_list;

  /* gdk_input_list_devices returns an internal list, so we shouldn't
     free it afterwards */
  tmp_list = gdk_input_list_devices();

  while (tmp_list)
    {
      GdkDeviceInfo *info = (GdkDeviceInfo *)tmp_list->data;

      if (info->deviceid == deviceid)
	{
	  printf("Button press on device '%s'\n", info->name);
	  return;
	}

      tmp_list = tmp_list->next;
    }
}
</verb></tscreen>

That completes the changes to ``XInputize'' our program. As with
the first version, the complete source is available at the location
from which you got this tutorial, or from:

<htmlurl url="http://www.msc.cornell.edu/~otaylor/gtk-gimp/tutorial"
name="http://www.msc.cornell.edu/~otaylor/gtk-gimp/tutorial">


<sect2> Further sophistications <label id="sec_Further_Sophistications">

<p>
Although our program now supports XInput quite well, it lacks some
features we would want in a full-featured application. First, the user
probably doesn't want to have to configure their device each time they
run the program, so we should allow them to save the device
configuration. This is done by iterating through the return of
<tt/gdk_input_list_devices()/ and writing out the configuration to a
file.

<p>
To restore the state next time the program is run, GDK provides
functions to change device configuration:

<tscreen><verb>
gdk_input_set_extension_events()
gdk_input_set_source()
gdk_input_set_mode()
gdk_input_set_axes()
gdk_input_set_key()
</verb></tscreen>

(The list returned from <tt/gdk_input_list_devices()/ should not be
modified directly.) An example of doing this can be found in the
drawing program gsumi. (Available from <htmlurl
url="http://www.msc.cornell.edu/~otaylor/gsumi/"
name="http://www.msc.cornell.edu/~otaylor/gsumi/">) Eventually, it
would be nice to have a standard way of doing this for all
applications. This probably belongs at a slightly higher level than
GTK, perhaps in the GNOME library.

<p>
Another major ommission that we have mentioned above is the lack of
cursor drawing. Platforms other than XFree86 currently do not allow
simultaneously using a device as both the core pointer and directly by
an application. See the <url
url="http://www.msc.cornell.edu/~otaylor/xinput/XInput-HOWTO.html"
name="XInput-HOWTO"> for more information about this. This means that
applications that want to support the widest audience need to draw
their own cursor.

<p>
An application that draws it's own cursor needs to do two things:
determine if the current device needs a cursor drawn or not, and
determine if the current device is in proximity. (If the current
device is a drawing tablet, it's a nice touch to make the cursor 
disappear when the stylus is lifted from the tablet. When the
device is touching the stylus, that is called "in proximity.")
The first is done by searching the device list, as we did
to find out the device name. The second is achieved by selecting
"proximity_out" events. An example of drawing one's own cursor is
found in the 'testinput' program found in the GTK distribution.

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Tips For Writing GTK Applications
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<p>
This section is simply a gathering of wisdom, general style guidelines and hints to
creating good GTK applications. It is totally useless right now cause it's
only a topic sentence :)

Use GNU autoconf and automake!  They are your friends :)  I am planning to
make a quick intro on them here.

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Contributing
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<p>
This document, like so much other great software out there, was created for
free by volunteers.  If you are at all knowledgeable about any aspect of GTK
that does not already have documentation, please consider contributing to
this document.
<p>
If you do decide to contribute, please mail your text to Tony Gale, 
<tt><htmlurl url="mailto:gale@gtk.org"
name="gale@gtk.org"></tt>. Also, be aware that the entirety of this 
document is free, and any addition by yourself must also be free.  That is, 
people may use any portion of your examples in their programs, and copies 
of this document may be distributed at will etc.
<p>
Thank you.

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Credits
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
I would like to thank the following for their contributions to this text.

<itemize>
<item>Bawer Dagdeviren, <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:chamele0n@geocities.com"
name="chamele0n@geocities.com"></tt> for the menus tutorial.			      

<item>Raph Levien, <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:raph@acm.org"
name="raph@acm.org"></tt>
for hello world ala GTK, widget packing, and general all around wisdom.
He's also generously donated a home for this tutorial.

<item>Peter Mattis, <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:petm@xcf.berkeley.edu"
name="petm@xcf.berkeley.edu"></tt> for the simplest GTK program.. 
and the ability to make it :)

<item>Werner Koch <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:werner.koch@guug.de"
name="werner.koch@guug.de"></tt> for converting the original plain text to
SGML, and the widget class hierarchy.

<item>Mark Crichton <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:crichton@expert.cc.purdue.edu"
name="crichton@expert.cc.purdue.edu"></tt> for the menu factory code, and
the table packing tutorial.

<item>Owen Taylor <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:owt1@cornell.edu"
name="owt1@cornell.edu"></tt> for the EventBox widget section (and
the patch to the distro).  He's also responsible for the selections code and
tutorial, as well as the sections on writing your own GTK widgets, and the
example application.  Thanks a lot Owen for all you help!

<item>Mark VanderBoom <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:mvboom42@calvin.edu"
name="mvboom42@calvin.edu"></tt> for his wonderful work on the Notebook,
Progress Bar, Dialogs, and File selection widgets.  Thanks a lot Mark!
You've been a great help.

<item>Tim Janik <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:timj@psynet.net"
name="timj@psynet.net"></tt> for his great job on the Lists Widget.
Thanks Tim :)

<item>Rajat Datta <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:rajat@ix.netcom.com"
name="rajat@ix.netcom.com"</tt> for the excellent job on the Pixmap tutorial.

<item>Michael K. Johnson <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:johnsonm@redhat.com"
name="johnsonm@redhat.com"></tt> for info and code for popup menus. 

</itemize>
<p>
And to all of you who commented and helped refine this document.
<p>
Thanks.

<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> Tutorial Copyright and Permissions Notice
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->

<p>
The GTK Tutorial is Copyright (C) 1997 Ian Main. 

Copyright (C) 1998 Tony Gale.
<p>
Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this 
manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are 
preserved on all copies.
<P>Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of 
this document under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that 
this copyright notice is included exactly as in the original,
and that the entire resulting derived work is distributed under 
the terms of a permission notice identical to this one.
<P>Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this 
document into another language, under the above conditions for modified 
versions.
<P>If you are intending to incorporate this document into a published 
work, please contact the maintainer, and we will make an effort 
to ensure that you have the most up to date information available.
<P>There is no guarentee that this document lives up to its intended
purpose.  This is simply provided as a free resource.  As such,
the authors and maintainers of the information provided within can
not make any guarentee that the information is even accurate.
</article>
